JP7451212B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, which are examples of gaming machines, include electronic components such as display means such as a liquid crystal display and light emitting means such as LEDs (light emitting diodes).

Among this type of gaming machines, for example, there have been machines that have been able to perform effects similar to those in which a movable body as a structure is moved by moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display (for example, Patent Document (see 1).

JP 2019-92949 Publication

Like the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the pseudo movable body is simply displayed moving in the same way as the movable body, and there is a problem in that the interest of the performance cannot be increased.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of displaying pseudo-movable objects.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
An electronic component that is visible to the player;
a specific member provided around the electronic component;
a translucent member that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
A predetermined electronic component that is difficult or invisible to the player, and
a predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component;
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The light-transmitting member is provided in front of the electronic component and the specific member,
The predetermined member has a color that is not similar to that of the predetermined electronic component,
A decorative portion is provided at a position corresponding to a boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a special effect that notifies that the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
A specific performance can be executed before the special performance is executed,
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display can be displayed in a moving manner in the specific performance and the special performance,
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in the specific performance, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, the display moves from the second display position to the first display. It is possible to hide the display without moving it to a position, and display a suggestion image suggesting execution of the special effect in a display area including the second display position,
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in the special performance, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, the display moves from the second display position to the first display. It is possible to move to a position and display it and then hide it.
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
Predetermined electronic components (for example, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or invisible to the player;
A predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.);
a display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed across the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12),
The predetermined member has a color that is not similar to that of the predetermined electronic component,
The performance execution means is
a pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display performance is executed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design. Further, as for the predetermined electronic parts that are difficult or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are being executed.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, it has been possible to perform performances using movable bodies that can be operated, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-92949, and by moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display, There were some that made it possible to perform a performance similar to that of moving a movable body. However, in such gaming machines, there is a problem in that the pseudo-movable objects are simply moved and displayed in the same way as the movable objects, and it is not possible to increase the interest of the performance. There is a need to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the display.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
a pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display performance is executed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are being executed.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the production control board concerning feature parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the storage area concerning feature parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining moving image data and text display process tables related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the text display process table regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of text display control regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the text display setting information regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a text display regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the screen display regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing effect drawing commands related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect drawing synthesis process related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of execution of image processing related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of an image display regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the reach effect content and drawing processing pattern regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining drawing processing patterns related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure showing the production execution period concerning feature parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the example of performance execution concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. It is a front view showing a game board of a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10-3. It is a front view showing a light guide plate device. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main parts of the light guide plate device, (B) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main parts in (B). (A) is a front view showing the first production unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first production unit as viewed diagonally from the front. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in Figure 10-7(A), (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in Figure 10-7(A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E- in Figure 10-7(A). It is an E sectional view. (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. 10-11(B) is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B). FIG. (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a FF sectional view of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first production unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. It is a diagram for comparing the first production unit and the variable winning ball unit. It is a diagram for explaining similar colors. (A) is a front view showing the second production unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second production unit with the cover member removed. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H in FIG. 10-17(A). (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second presentation unit. (A) is a front view showing a third production unit and a fourth production unit. (A) is a sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 10-20. 10-20 is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 10-20. It is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility situation of the 3rd production unit and the 4th production unit. It is a figure showing composition of a 3rd production unit and a 4th production unit. It is a figure which shows the presentation mode when the 3rd presentation unit and the 4th presentation unit emit light. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third production unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the third production unit is located in the production position. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 241SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 241SG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns. It is a diagram showing execution periods of various performances in normal reach and super reach. It is a diagram for explaining the content and structure of various performances in Super Reach. It is a diagram showing the jackpot expectation degree according to the execution status of the advanced presentation A and the advanced presentation B. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development flow of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the movable mounting body, and (B) is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the movable mounting body is lifted. (A) is a diagram showing a moving display mode of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a moving mode of the first non-mounted movable body. (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the second pseudo movable object display, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body. (A) is a movable range of a mounted movable body, (B) is a diagram showing a movable display area of a first pseudo movable body display, and (C) is a diagram showing a movable display area of a second pseudo movable body display. (A) is a diagram showing a specific moving display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a specific moving display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a preview performance type determination process. (A) is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance A, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance B. (A) is a flowchart showing advanced performance A type determination processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining advanced performance A type. (A) is a flowchart showing the advanced suggestion performance type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining the advanced suggestion performance type. (A) is a flowchart showing advanced performance B type determination processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining advanced performance B type. (A) is a flowchart showing a fixed performance type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a fixed performance type determination table. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations mainly in normal reach of super reach β. (A) to (J) are diagrams mainly showing examples of performance operations in weak super reach. (A) to (F) are also diagrams showing examples of performance operations in weak super reach. (A) to (D) are diagrams mainly showing examples of performance operations in strong super reach. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of strong super reach performance. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of production operations after notification of jackpot confirmation. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of movement display of the first pseudo movable body display. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between a light emitting display section and a mounted movable body LED. (A) to (F) are diagrams illustrating an example of performance operation of preview performance B in super reach γ. (A) to (F) are diagrams illustrating an example of performance operation of preview performance B in super reach γ. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a first pseudo movable body display and a second pseudo movable body display. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a first modification of the characteristic portion 241SG. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a second modification of the characteristic portion 241SG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 75SG001),
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the electronic parts become less noticeable due to the specific members having similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
Predetermined electronic components (for example, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or invisible to the player;
A predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.);
Equipped with
The predetermined member is characterized in that it has a color that is not similar to the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, for the predetermined electronic parts that are difficult or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or 2,
Comprising a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is provided at a position farther from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic components are located away from the display means that attracts the attention of the player, so that they are less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
A protruding portion (e.g., protruding portion 3A) provided above the electronic component (e.g., LED board 603, 803) and protruding toward the player side than the electronic component;
The protrusion is larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic component is in the shadow of the protrusion and becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine described in Form 4,
The electronic component (e.g., LED board 603, 803) and the specific member (e.g., base member 601, 801) are dark colored (e.g., black) (modified example)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the electronic component can easily disappear into the shadow of the protrusion, making it less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
The specific member is characterized in that the brightness or saturation of the color is higher than that of the electronic component.
According to this feature, since the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component, it is possible to make the electronic component relatively less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 6,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed across the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
The electronic component (for example, LED board 303) is a circuit board,
The specific member (e.g., base member 301) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that has at least some aspects in common with the circuit pattern (e.g., printed wiring 320) formed on the circuit board. (See Figure 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine described in Form 7 or 8,
The specific member (e.g., base member 301) has a predetermined area (e.g., rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that is visible from the player side without passing through the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302). ,
A predetermined decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that is the same or similar in aspect to the decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) of the transparent member is provided in the predetermined area (see FIG. 10-12).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to understand that the specific member and the light-transmitting member are different members.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
A decorative portion (e.g., decorative portion 420) provided at a position corresponding to a boundary (e.g., boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401). (See Figure 10-19)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by the player, the boundaries between the electronic components and specific components are obscured by the decorative parts, making the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design. can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The decorative part includes a plurality of decorative parts,
A plurality of predetermined decorative parts are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The plurality of decorative parts are larger in number than the plurality of predetermined decorative parts.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is made difficult to see by the plurality of decorative parts, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 11,
The light-transmitting member (for example, cover member 402) has a boundary corresponding area corresponding to the boundary (for example, boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (for example, LED board 403) and the specific member (for example, base member 401). (for example, a convex portion 410) and a boundary non-corresponding region (for example, a region other than the convex portion 410) that does not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The light transmittance of the boundary corresponding area is lower than the light transmittance of the boundary non-corresponding area.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member through the boundary corresponding area, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to Form 11 or 12,
A logotype (for example, the letter "V") is displayed on the decoration part (for example, the decoration part 420) (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player focuses on the logotype and becomes less aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 11 to 13,
The electronic component (for example, LED board 403) includes a light emitting means (for example, second presentation LED 404A) that can cause the decoration part (for example, decoration part 420) to emit light (see FIG. 10-18).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion stands out due to the light emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine described in Form 14,
The light emitting means (for example, the second effect LED 404A) is provided so that the decoration part (for example, the decoration part 420) can emit surface light (for example, the light from the second effect LED 404A is emitted from the inner lens). The entire front surface of the convex part 410 including the decoration part 420 emits light from the front surface of the convex part 410 by being emitted substantially uniformly forward from the entire front surface of the convex part 405 and incident on the area corresponding to the convex part 410.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion stands out due to the surface emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 15,
Around the electronic component (for example, the LED board 803) and the specific member (for example, the base member 801), a presentation means (for example, the third presentation unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic component and the specific member is provided. (See Figure 10-20)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by players, the visibility of the presentation means is higher than the visibility of the electronic components, making the electronic components less noticeable, increasing the degree of freedom in design. be able to.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine described in Form 16,
The presentation means (for example, the third presentation unit 600) is provided closer to the player (front side) than the electronic component (for example, the LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine according to Form 16 or 17,
A presentation section (e.g., light emitting presentation section 630) provided in the presentation means (e.g., third presentation unit 600) so as to be visible to the player is larger than the electronic component (e.g., LED board 803) (FIG. 10). -20 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16 to 18,
A presentation section (e.g., light emitting presentation section 630) provided in the presentation means (e.g., third presentation unit 600) so as to be visible to the player has better visibility than the color of the electronic component (e.g., LED board 803). It is characterized by the fact that it is considered to be a color with a high level of color.
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16 to 19,
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) has a light emitting means (for example, third effect LEDs 604A, 604B) capable of emitting light toward the player (see FIG. 10-21(A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the presentation means can be easily improved.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
It further includes a specific light-transmitting member (for example, cover plate 702A of variable winning ball unit 700) that is a member having light-transmitting properties and is provided at a different position from the light-transmitting member,
The transmittance (for example, XA%, XB%) of transmitting the light that has entered the light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (for example, the T direction) is higher than that of the light that has entered the specific light-transmitting member. Lower than the transmittance (for example, Y%) that transmits light in the predetermined direction (see Figure 10-14)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if electronic components are placed so that they can be seen by the player, the electronic components become less noticeable because the translucency of the translucent member is lower than the translucency of the specific translucent member. The degree of freedom can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine described in Form 21,
The thickness of the light-transmitting member (for example, the front-to-back dimensions L1A, L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the thickness of the specific light-transmitting member (for example, the front-to-back dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIG. 10-14). )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light transmittance of the light transmitting member is reduced, making the electronic components less noticeable.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 22,
The light-transmitting member (for example, the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color,
The predetermined color is similar to the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).
According to this feature, the light-transmitting member blends in with the electronic component and the specific member, making the electronic component less noticeable.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the gaming area), special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information are variably displayed (also referred to as a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). , the first suspension display 25A displays the first suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the second suspension storage number based on the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the starting winning hole door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning hole is opened. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state where the game ball can enter the second starting winning port (second It is also said that the starting prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable prize winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
When the player rotates the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are launched toward the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command specifying the time of recovery from a power outage, the performance control CPU 120 indicates, for example, that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power outage or is in the process of recovering from the power outage. , performs a screen display for notification. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation of characteristic parts regarding setting values)
Hereinafter, the characteristic parts regarding the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in a board case that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown in the drawings, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching the pachinko game machine 1 to a setting value changing state in which the setting values can be changed, and a lock switch for changing the setting value changing state, which will be described later. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as winning probability (ball output rate), and an opening sensor that detects opening of a slot for a gaming machine are provided. Note that the setting value change state in this embodiment is also a state (setting value confirmation state) in which a game parlor attendant or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch that can be operated by an attendant of the game hall are provided in the setting changeover main body, and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back side of the board case so that they can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case housing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and setting changeover switch when the gaming machine frame is closed, but they can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame using a designated door key. . Furthermore, since the lock switch requires the operation of a setting key owned by an attendant of the game parlor, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be turned on and off using a setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but a single key may be used for both.

A display monitor that can display set values and base values is arranged in the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged at the top of the board case. That is, the display monitor is placed in front of the main board 11 in the board case when viewed visually. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 means the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is open. This is the front of the pachinko game machine 1, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. In this way, the display monitor is placed in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame open. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko game machine 1.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. The first to fourth display parts of the display monitor are each made up of 7 segments that are made up of 7 segments that form a figure 8, and dots placed at the bottom right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting up or blinking in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, white, etc., respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in extremely short cycles.

A game information display section may be provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability change lamp, and a time saving lamp are arranged all together. The round display device can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot during the jackpot game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy/high-base state as a time-saving state or a jackpot game state. The variable probability lamp lights up when in a variable probability state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time is being saved. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The setting value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. Further, as for the setting value, the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming parlor side, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the value becomes more advantageous for the gaming parlor side. If the ball payout rate changes depending on the setting value, for example, the probability of jackpot may change depending on the setting value, or the jackpot probability may be constant but the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change depending on the setting value. Good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows an example of the configuration of various circuits mounted on the production control board 12 regarding the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 8-1, various circuits such as a production control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a production data memory 91AK123, a ROM91AK124, a RAM91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the production control board 12. ing. The production control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU91AK131, a VDP91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the performance control command received from the main board 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, and other decorations. It is sufficient if it is an integrated processor in which a circuit that can control execution of a performance using some or all of a plurality of performance devices such as LEDs for use in production, movable members for performance such as the movable body 32, etc., is integrated into one chip. . The production control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP91AK132, and a built-in memory 91AK136, while some or all of the audio processing circuit 91AK133, lamp control circuit 91AK134, and motor control circuit 91AK135 are included in the production control microprocessor. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in response to a request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The performance data memory 91AK123 stores in advance performance data that can be used to execute a performance using the performance device, such as various image data representing display images on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 only needs to include moving image data and still image data. As still image data, for example, character image data that is sprite image data that is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, is used. It's fine if it's prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, image data of arbitrary character images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, effect images showing people, figures, symbols, etc., and background images are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. All you have to do is stay there. As the still image data, for example, text image data that allows characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of motor drive data used for rotationally driving a drive motor that operates a movable member such as the movable body 32. The performance data memory 91AK123 may be any nonvolatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal use state where the progress of the performance is controlled, the performance data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device.

The ROM91AK124 stores computer programs and fixed data for effect control. The RAM91AK125 provides a work area for the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the settings of the built-in register, and when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs, a timeout signal is generated as a time elapsed signal. generate a signal. The timeout signal is input to the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100. Upon generation of the timeout signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the production control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM91AK124 stores various table data used to control performance operations in addition to programs for performance control. For example, the ROM91AK124 contains table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables and decision tables prepared for the CPU91AK131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, and table data constituting various production control patterns. Pattern data etc. are stored. The performance control pattern includes, for example, performance control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the performance control process timer judgment value, an end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the production control pattern and production control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of commands in which a series of transfer commands and the like to be executed by the VDP91AK132 are written in accordance with the order of image processing. The display list may include a mixture of display control commands, audio control commands, lamp control commands, and motor control commands. By controlling the progress of the performance using such a display list, it is sufficient to be able to control the electric components for the performance in a coordinated manner. The RAM91AK125 stores programs and various data used to control the electric components for presentation. The CPU 91AK131 only needs to be able to read the programs and data stored in the RAM 91AK125 in a shorter reading time than the reading time of the programs and data stored in the ROM 91AK124.

The CPU91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. At this time, the CPU91AK131 executes a performance control process for controlling the progress of the performance using the electric components for the performance according to the program read from the ROM91AK124. The effect control processing includes, for example, fixed data read processing in which the CPU 91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK124, variable data write processing in which the CPU 91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores it, and CPU91AK131 performs various types of data temporarily stored in the RAM91AK125. Variation data read processing for reading variation data of Good too.

The VDP91AK132 determines the content of control of image display in the image display device 5 based on display control commands and register settings from the CPU91AK131. For example, the VDP91AK132 controls the variable display of decorative patterns and various types of effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor that has image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. Note that the VDP91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor more generally referred to as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction part (instruction code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131, and instructs image processing etc. according to the decoding result. For example, a group of instructions for display control included in the decoding result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The voice control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The lamp control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The motor control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123, etc., and outputs the separated data into video data and audio data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data and text image data from the performance data memory 91AK123 and the like, decompress and decode the data, and then supply the data to the character image renderer 91AK145 and the text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing that can adjust the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the video data, or some or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted video data in the VRAM 91AK147. It's okay. The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the vector format character image data into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 performs image conversion processing to display the character image specified by the character image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert vector format text image data into a bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 performs image conversion processing to display the text image specified by the text image specification information in the display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM91AK147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP91AK132. The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with various areas such as a palette area where palette data is placed, a character buffer where character image data is stored, a text buffer where text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. It is used for preservation. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (gradation control signal) according to the display data created in the VDP91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM91AK147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM91AK147, such as the built-in memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which the display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by the VDP91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data) created by the VDP91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, polygons, etc. data) etc. Note that the frame buffer includes, for example, an actual display area that stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a real display area that stores display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may also be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen of the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 in the virtual display area of the frame buffer is created, and the display data in the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. In this way, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores display data of each effect image created by drawing processing. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V blank occurs. The V blank is generated at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time a V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may also be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area every time a V blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and an image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. Display data created in the drawing process is stored in the storage area.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates an audio signal that enables audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R, based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Further, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of storing audio data not included in the moving image data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the performance data memory 91AK123, ROM91AK124, etc., for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding the audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light emission modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP91AK132, and outputs it to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) of a drive motor that operably drives a movable member for performance such as the movable body 32. The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 132, and outputs it to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built into the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, and is capable of storing various data used to control the progress of the performance.

FIG. 8-2 shows an example of the configuration of the storage area for effect control depending on the storage contents. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, and 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided, for example, so as to be included in the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or a part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores performance control programs and performance control management data, and functions as a management area for performance control programs and the like. For example, table data that is the configuration data of various tables prepared for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data that constitutes the performance control pattern, etc. are stored in the storage area as management data. It is sufficient if it is stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, a display process table that defines procedures for displaying production images, etc. are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. All you have to do is stay there. The image processing program may include a program that converts vector format image data to bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program that generates a bitmap text image based on text written using character codes and font data.

The storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and its related data. For video data, compressed image information including reference images, predicted images, etc. is generated by compression encoding processing such as motion compensated predictive encoding using multiple frames of original images, and is multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files that constitute a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table performs a display control process that allows the display content and display mode of the moving image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image that is reproduced and displayed in correspondence with the moving image data. The display mode of a moving image is a mode or form when a moving image is played back and displayed, including a display style and a display layout of the moving image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be still image data in which arbitrary character images representing a plurality of types of decorative designs, people, figures, symbols, etc. are described in a vector format or a bitmap format. The character image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files that constitute a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that allows the display content and display mode of the character image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. It will be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode and form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM13 stores text image related data including text image data and its related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted into the glyph shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates connecting the outline for each character used to display a text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or together with the outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the glyph shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying straight line or curve parameters for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. Text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string that is a combination of multiple character images, and includes arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, clauses, words, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient as long as it indicates the unit of the unit in a recognizable manner. Furthermore, the text image data may represent a text image consisting of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using text image data may indicate subtitles, subtitles, or other information-conveying characters. It may also indicate decorative characters. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when the VDP91AK132 executes an image processing program, so it may be stored in either the ROM91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. In this way, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, and built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute the text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that allows the display content and display mode of the text image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to be changed according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. It will be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode and form when displaying the character image, including the display style and display layout of the text image. Note that the table data and data files that constitute the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The storage area 91AKM14 stores audio-related data including audio data and its related data. The audio data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the audio that is played back and output in synchronization with the image in the performance using a moving image display, and can be played back and output as any audio as the performance progresses in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is fine as long as it is done. The audio-related data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table. The audio output process table is used for audio control processing that can change the sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Note that table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as production control management data.

In the VDP91AK132 of the production control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142, and is separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the video renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data that is the data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compressed and encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 and then input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data that is the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of determining the moving image data and text display process table according to the contents of the reach effect. In the super reach reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to perform an effect by displaying a moving image using moving image data and an effect by displaying a text image using text image data. The period during which the effect by displaying the moving image is performed and the period during which the effect by displaying the text image is performed may be partly or completely the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used to control display is set, for example, when displaying a text image that is a combination of a plurality of character images.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 is determined according to the content of the reach effect, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 is determined. be done. Among these, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the content of the reach effect. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", the moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (loss)", the moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, there are cases where the text display process table can be determined in common even for different reach effect contents, and cases where it cannot be determined. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (lose)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

Text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)" or In the case of "SP reach B (loss)", the decision cannot be made. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" or In the case of "SP reach A (loss)", the decision cannot be made. In this way, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of text images when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", a video display using video data 91AKD01 is executed, and when the reach performance content is "SP reach A (loss)", a video display is performed. An effect is performed by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD11. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD01 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD11. Can be displayed. If the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (Jackpot)", a video display using video data 91AKD02 is executed, and if the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (loss)", a video display is performed. An effect is performed by displaying a moving image using the data 91AKD12. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Can be displayed. Therefore, a text image using a common text display process table can be added to and displayed on a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 8-4 shows an example of the structure of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A1) shows an example of the structure of the text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in response to the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. 8-4 (A2) shows the reach effect of SP reach A. A configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in accordance with the production is shown. FIG. 8-4(B) shows an example of the structure of the text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to the SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include text image designation information and text display setting information that are set in association with each other in a single text display period. The text display period specifies, for each text image to be displayed, a start time to start displaying the text image and an end time to end the display. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image in the reach effect has started, or may be specified using the elapsed time since the variable display has started. It's okay. However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the video image, the start and end times of the text display period are determined using the elapsed time since the video image display started. It is desirable to specify. The elapsed time from the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display changed to the reach mode, so even if the video image is a common reach effect due to the variable display effect before the variable display changed to the reach mode, The timing at which the display starts may vary. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time since the display of the moving image started, the timing at which a specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be improved. The text image designation information specifies text image data used for displaying a text image in a specifiable manner. For example, the text image designation information may be any information that designates the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information can be used to specify the content of the text image to be displayed using any character code, such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), or JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.). It may be information that specifies. The text display setting information is information that specifies the display mode of the text image in a configurable manner based on display style information, display layout information, other metadata, etc. of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be written using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table only needs to be able to set text image designation information and text display setting information in association with each other in a text display period by using arbitrary table data.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 8-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T10. Display of a moving image starts at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A1), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 Displays the specified text image. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed. Display. Note that timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Displays the specified text image. Note that timing T08 is a timing that arrives after timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 Displays the specified text image. Furthermore, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. Display. After timing T05 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Displays the specified text image.

In this way, the text image specified by the text image specification information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a period that is partially or entirely common to a second text display period that is different from the first text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. 3 text display periods are included. In this case, the first text display period has a part in common with the second text display period, and a part in common with the third text display period. In this way, the first text display period includes a period that is partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period that is partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is common to the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is common to the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include a period in which a part is common to each other. In this way, a part of the first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and a part of the second text display period may be included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the entire first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and the entire second text display period may be included in the first text display period.

Depending on the settings in the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image specification information can be displayed in accordance with a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the video image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. As a second text display period included in the first text display period, a text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, text image designation information 91AKA03 or text The text image specified by the image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. With such settings, only the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification is applied to the display of the first text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification information is used to display the first text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image specified by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image specified by text image specification information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is changed so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 display the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and display the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 from timing T02 to timing T03. The text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text The text image specified by the image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to the common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when moving images using common moving image data are displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least part of the plurality of text display periods, so that the display of the text images can be improved. Components can be changed. Note that when moving images using common moving image data are displayed, the text image serving as the display mode may be changed in all of the multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. good. When video images using common video data are displayed, some or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. You can also let In this way, it may be possible to change part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one video image, or it is possible to change part or all of the text image added to one video image. You can also use it as

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), in the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image designation information 91AKA21 Displays the specified text image. Furthermore, during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA23 is displayed. Display. Note that timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After timing T15 has elapsed, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. Displays the specified text image.

FIG. 8-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields, such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field allows setting of the font family, which is the font type, for the font of characters included in the text image. The fontSize field allows you to set the font size at which the text image will be displayed. The fontWeight field allows setting the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field allows setting the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field allows setting the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of the characters in the text image, such as regular, italic, or italic. The textAlign field allows you to set the alignment of characters included in a text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorative displays added to the text image, such as underlines, overlines, strikethroughs, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information allows the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to be set.

FIG. 8-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 8-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 8-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 8-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. The text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. The text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in the text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image specification information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the video image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, due to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As a second text display period included in this first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in display style and display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, a third text display period included in the first text display period is specified by text image specification information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. It may be displayed in different display layouts. With such settings, only the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed as text during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, in the first text display period, the text image specification is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The text image specified by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style and display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, which is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It can be displayed using the display style and display layout set by . In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, which is different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed using the display style and display layout set by . Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in a text display setting different from the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. The information 91 may be displayed in the display style and display layout set by AKB13. In this way, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. In addition to displaying the text image in one display mode, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. In the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. At the same time, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, in a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is first displayed. The text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of text images added to a moving image, some text images can be displayed in a different display mode from other text images. Furthermore, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, there are cases in which the text image in the second display mode is changed to a text image in the third display mode and then displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed, as in the case where the text image of the mode is changed to the text image of the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text The text image specified by the specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Further, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01, corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Display. Also, corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. In this case, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA21 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. Further, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 can be displayed in the same display mode as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02. In this way, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05, corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15, corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this way, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes depending on the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. Further, in the plurality of text display process tables, at least some of the text image specification information and text display setting information set in association with the plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and , some or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and second component regarding the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A), the display color of the text image is set to change stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF using the color field. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), in the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text display A text image in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01 is displayed. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), a text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is a second component regarding the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed depending on the elapsed time. Note that, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changeable depending on the reach effect content etc. even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, for example, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at different rates depending on whether the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" or not is controlled to be in an advantageous state. may be determined, or may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Furthermore, even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information, the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, can be changed depending on the execution result of the production control program by the CPU91AK131. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP91AK132 only needs to be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on display control commands from the CPU91AK131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed by simply changing some of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, thereby preventing an increase in data volume and processing load. , it becomes possible to display a variety of text images. When changing the display color of a text image, other display styles may also be correspondingly changeable. For example, if the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image will be easier for the player to visually recognize, and if the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image will be difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image that is displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white will be displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be good if it could be changed so that This makes it possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's discomfort when displaying the text image.

FIG. 8-7 shows an example of performing an effect in which a text image is displayed using a text display process table. In this execution example, text images are displayed in accordance with a plurality of text display periods along with the moving image display when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. In the reach effect of SP Reach A, a moving image is displayed using moving image data 91AKD01 when the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", and a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 when the display result of the variable display is a "loss". A moving image is displayed using the data 91AKD11. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, an effect display that is a battle effect in which a common ally character and an enemy character compete is performed, and for example, the battle result is displayed. It is sufficient that the contents of the effect display be the same until the timing of notification. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 becomes high, and when the display result of the variable display is a "loss", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01. becomes higher. Therefore, in the reach effect of SP Reach A, even in the video display period which is the common effect display content, the jackpot expectation level can be varied depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table. I can do it.

The effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A) is the effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and the text image designation information 91AKA01 corresponds to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. The text image specified by is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 has the origin coordinates (300,30), for example, as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. The font family is AA_gothic, which is a Gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, and the text image display color changes gradually from #FF0040 to #4000FF. The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP91AK132 executes image conversion processing to display the text image in the display mode including the display style and display layout specified by the text display specification information. good.

Further, in the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is changed to the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It is displayed in the display mode set by . In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 has the origin coordinates (250,600 ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponds to normal character thickness, the text image display color is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character arrangement is left-justified, and the character decoration is not set.

The production execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B1) includes production contents different from the text display process table 91AKT02 when the text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and is displayed in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 has, for example, the origin coordinates (250,600) and the font family as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size is 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color is #000000, background display color is #FFFFFF, character style is normal Components in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding regular font, character arrangement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, font family, font size, font thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, text styles, and text alignment have changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display part of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

The effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2) includes different effect contents from the text display process table 91AKT01 when the text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and is executed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. Correspondingly, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Super hot" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has the origin coordinates (250,600) and the font family DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the text image display color is gold, corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is effect_gold, which is the effect display setting for gold display. Compared to the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Text style, text placement, and text decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by text image specification information, among the data corresponding to multiple fields included in the text display setting information, data to be changed and data not to be changed can be individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this manner, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, if you want to change and display one data among the data corresponding to multiple fields included in the text display setting information, the first data and Other data associated in advance may also be changed and displayed. For example, when changing the display color of a text image to gold corresponding to "gold" and displaying it, it is only necessary to change the text decoration to the effect display setting for gold display using effect_gold.

The display color and background display color of the text image are for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), for example, the brightness (gradation) is one of "0" to "255". The level can be set in 256 steps. In text display setting information, the field data that makes up the color field and backgroundColor field has a common data format with the field data that makes up the color field and backgroundColor field, for example, in character display setting information used to display character images. All you have to do is stay there. Further, the coordinates of the origin when displaying a text image can be set by a combination of the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a common data format with the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common to field data included in the setting information used to display a production image different from a text image, such as character display setting information. It may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is only necessary that the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using information common to a production image different from the text image. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

Font families that can be set when displaying text images are not set when displaying character images. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data that is not included in the character display setting information. Furthermore, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontSize field corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may be different from the field data included in the setting information used to display a production image different from a text image, such as character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in a production image different from the text image. Good too. Thereby, a variety of text images can be displayed by flexibly changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

For example, if a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the text decoration becomes the effect display setting for gold display using effect_gold. In the text display setting information, when "gold" is set in the color field, effect_gold is set in the textDecoration field to display a glossy text image and to display gold around the text image. It is possible to add and display a special effect image. In the production execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when the text image specification information 91A13 specifies a specific text image indicating the line "Super hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 allows for gold display. By setting the display style, etc., a specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with gloss, and an effect image for golden display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and improve the interest of the presentation by displaying the text image.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when an effect is executed by displaying a moving image using moving image data, by adding an effect by displaying a text image using text image data, it is easier for the player to recognize the content of the effect. This makes it easier to provide information that is different from the content of the performance. In this case, if the data structure is such that text image data is compressed and encoded and multiplexed as video data included in the video data, the outline of the text image will be Problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. Furthermore, if different video image data is prepared depending on the display content of the text image display added to the video image display, the data capacity of the video data tends to increase, and the processing load of the image data also increases. It becomes easier. If special compression encoding processing or decompression decoding processing is performed in order to prevent deterioration of display quality in text image display, there is a risk that the processing load of image data will further increase.

The characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK add a text image display effect using text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 when a moving image display effect using the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize the content of the performance. In addition, since text image display effects are added using text image data stored separately from the video data, it is possible to avoid an increase in the data capacity of the video data and an increase in the processing load of the image data. , it becomes possible to appropriately control the display so as to prevent it as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information, as a first component related to the text image, designates the display content of the text image according to the text image data. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to perform image conversion processing, etc. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one video image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed depending on the elapsed time, etc. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first and second components related to the text image added to the first video image, various text image displays can be performed easily and with high quality, and data capacity and processing burden can be reduced. Appropriate display control becomes possible so that the increase is prevented.

When the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. If the reach effect content is "SP reach A (lose)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. In addition, when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is displayed. It is possible to add and display the used text image. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (lose)", when the effect by displaying a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed, either the text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used. It can be displayed with a text image added. In this way, a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, can be added to and displayed on a plurality of mutually different moving images. By making it possible to add and display text images using common data to multiple video images, it is possible to display a variety of text images easily and with high quality, while also preventing increases in data volume and processing load. This makes it possible to control the display appropriately.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the line "It's super hot" are displayed based on the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 that are set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style and the like may be displayed so as to be changeable at the timing of . A text image that shows the line "Super hot" is a text image that corresponds to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of becoming a "jackpot". It only needs to be a text image. In this way, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component, such as the display mode regarding the specific text image, may be changeable at multiple timings.

FIG. 8-8 shows an example of display control in a case where the display style of a text image indicating the line "Super hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and no text decoration is set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042 is During the display period, the display color is gold and no text decoration is set, and during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the effect display setting is such that the text decoration is gold. Note that the text image display styles that are common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 include a font whose font family is DD_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font by the fontFamily field, and a font size of 72px by the fontSize field, respectively. It is set.

FIG. 8-8(A) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black, which corresponds to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to no setting, which corresponds to none. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is black and no text decoration is set.

FIG. 8-8(B) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the text decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, a glossy text image can be displayed, for example, by displaying a gradation of the text image. However, if the text image display is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the golden display.

FIG. 8-8(C) shows a case where a text image with the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the text decoration to effect display settings for gold display corresponding to effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the line "Super Hot" is controlled so that the display color is gold and the text decoration is set to effect display settings in gold. In addition to setting the display color of a text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to display an effect for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the outline of the text image Effect images can be added and displayed around text images using display colors such as shading and shading, border display using bevels and embossing, layer styles that add glow, and combinations of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to giving the text image a glossy appearance, by adding and displaying an effect image around the text image, it becomes easier for players to recognize the golden display, and the game It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, one part of the text image is distinguished from the other part by the text image designation information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 that are set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in different display styles. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image with the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image called "Character" out of the text information indicating the line "If this character wins..." to display the display color and background of the text image differently from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and font style.

FIGS. 8-9 show a display example in which a portion of a text image has a display style different from that of other portions. In this display example, a part of the text image "Character" is displayed with a white display color, a black background display color, and an italic text style, and the other part of the text image is displayed with a black display color. Display the background display color as white and the text style as normal. The text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to a part of the text image called "Character", and the color field sets the display color of the text image to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, the backgroundColor field sets the background display color to black corresponding to #000000, Set the italics corresponding to the italic character style using the fontStyle field. In addition, the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to other parts of the text image, with the color field setting the text image display color to black corresponding to #000000, the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the fontStyle field setting the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF. Set the normal font corresponding to the character style normal. Thereby, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of other portions, it is possible to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image.

In displaying a text image that constitutes a character string that is a combination of a plurality of character images, a portion that is displayed in a display style different from other portions may be changeable in accordance with the progress of the presentation by displaying the moving image. For example, when the performance of a song or the audio playback of dialogue progresses as a video image is displayed, a part of the text image that corresponds to the progress status is displayed in a display style that is different from the other parts, such as display in a specific color or highlight display. You may let them. The display style may be changeable so that a portion of the text image is displayed as a fade-in or fade-out in accordance with the progress of the performance of the music or the audio reproduction of the lines. This is not limited to the situation in which a song is played or the audio of a line is played along with a moving image display, but a part of the text image that is displayed in a different display style from the other parts can be changed depending on the elapsed time in the execution of a given performance. It may be possible. Thereby, in displaying the text image, a portion displayed in a display style different from other portions is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, so that the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

This invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiments, but it is possible to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may also include a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of a text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are changed depending on the elapsed time, etc. Execute either one of the following: display control that allows changes to be made depending on the video image, or display control that allows text images to be added and displayed using common text image data to multiple video images. It may also be possible to do one without executing the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be arbitrary components that can be changed, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. In place of or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of a text image, it is possible to change any component related to the display of a text image. It's okay. For example, when moving and displaying a text image, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position, the enlargement and reduction ratios when displaying enlarged or reduced text images, and the enlargement and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time. Any configuration element that can be set regarding the display of a text image may be changed as long as it is possible to change any component that can be set regarding the display of a text image, such as the time interval or amount of change for updating the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio when changing the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio.

When displaying a text image corresponding to common display content, the display mode of the text image can be changed by changing the text image setting information 91AKB01 shown in Figure 8-6(A). The present invention is not limited to changing the display color, but may be any display mode that can be changed such as an arbitrary display style or display layout. For example, a text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 has origin coordinates, font family, Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. A text image in a display mode set by text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be able to change a display mode different from the text image in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to being stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least some text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive and cursive, is multiplexed and compression encoded as part of the video data, and the video data separated from this video data is decompressed. It may be possible to display a text image in a specific manner by decoding it or the like. In this case, data regarding a text image in a specific manner is included in the moving image data and stored in the storage area 91AKM11. In this way, data related to text images includes specific text image related data included in moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11, and normal text image related data stored in storage area 91AKM13. It's okay.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. It may also be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 using text image specification information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read out without using font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not require field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings, such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data regarding the text display setting, such as textSize.

The scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only with data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or with, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to text images, such as word font data, which is not limited to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, may be prepared. If only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, an increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images, not limited to those used in display effects, is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the font data can be easily reused, so it is easier to design effects for displaying text images. The burden can be reduced, and when a large amount of text images are used in display effects, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

As a second component related to a text image, a specific text image whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at multiple timings is not limited to a text image showing the line "Super hot". , any text image that is preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group may be used. For example, among the plurality of types of text images, a text image prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of a song or a text image prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be used as the specific text image. In this way, for a specific text image that corresponds to an audio production or a display production whose content changes depending on the elapsed time, such as the playback output of a song or the playback display of a moving image, the second component such as the display mode can be set in multiple ways. It may be possible to change the timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display where the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display where the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be used as a specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to a text image of display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of being a "jackpot", but a text image of display content that suggests that the probability of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be used as a specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to a jackpot gaming state, but may include special gaming states such as a time saving state and a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit of the number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") which is greater than the second round number (for example, "7"), and that it can be performed in the time-saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (e.g., "100") that is higher than the second number (e.g., "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variable state is higher than the second probability (e.g., 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times the jackpot gaming state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive number of chances (for example, "5"). It may also include a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10") resulting in a more advantageous gaming situation for the player.

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where the display color of the text image is set to gold, which corresponds to "gold"; for example, it may be silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any other color different from metallic colors. This may include a case where the display color is set. The present invention is not limited to the display color of the text image, and when displaying a preset specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings should be made using the textDecoration field in the text display setting information so that an effect image can be added and displayed around the text image. Bye.

When displaying a text image as a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as intra-character coordinates or display time when displaying the text image. For example, if the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the display color can be changed to a different display color for each character coordinate of the text image. , it would be good if rainbow display were possible. For example, for the coordinates in the character 1, depending on the elapsed time, the display color changes from red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then from bluish-purple to reddish-purple. You can change multiple display colors one after another. At this time, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display is adjusted and each The display color of the coordinates within the text may be changed in the following order: red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, blue-violet, and red-violet. After red-purple, you can change the display color by returning to red again. This allows the player to smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" using the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the range of character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and improve the interest of the performance by displaying the text image. Note that by sequentially changing different display colors according to the intra-character coordinates of the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow manner. Alternatively, by sequentially changing a common display color for all intra-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this way, a text image may be displayed in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether or not a specific movement of the player is detected, or multiple components may be changed at different rates. It may be possible to change either of them. The specific actions of the player that enable the first component and the second component related to the text image to be changed include, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A serving as the V controller, and other operations such as a push operation or a pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A. It may be an arbitrary action of tilting the button 31b, or it may be an action of pressing down the push button 31b. Based on the detection results of any changes or differences in the detection target, such as the state of execution of processing or control on the detection target, changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target, without being limited to those that can detect the player's movements. In addition, the first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable. Detection devices capable of detecting movements, changes, differences, etc. in a detection target, such as infrared sensors, ultrasonic sensors, CCD sensors, and CMOS sensors, can detect the state of the detection target mechanically, electrically, electromagnetically, Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of a mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

A part or all of the effect by displaying a text image using text image data may be executed as a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the setting value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the setting value is 2. Yes, if the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the setting value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the setting value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the setting value is 2. Yes, if the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the setting value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to these determination ratio settings, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the rate at which the effect by text image display according to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. is made different depending on the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, it is easy to perform an effect by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01, and as the setting value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is easily executed. The ratio of performance based on image display increases. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)" and the effect by text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous to the player. The expectation level, which is a set value, increases.

In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, a limit is set such that in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in a range where the setting value is the specific setting value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate when the setting value is a specific setting value, but is not executed when the setting value is other than the specific setting value. In this way, within the range where the setting value is the specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in a range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, in the case of a special period, setting suggestion performance may be made executable at a higher rate than in a period other than the special period. In this case, a limit is set such that in a range that is a period other than the special period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion performance is lower than in a range that is a special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that can be executed at a predetermined rate during a special period, but is not executed during a period other than the special period. In this way, within the special period, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed within a period other than the special period.

The present invention is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is met, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not met. In this case, a limit is set in which the execution rate of the setting suggestion performance is lower in a range where the special condition is not met than in a range where the special condition is met. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that becomes executable at a predetermined rate when a special condition is met, but is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, setting suggestion effects can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limit is set in which the setting suggestion performance is not executed in a range where the special condition is not satisfied. The special condition may be any condition that can be established depending on the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of the judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance or the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be any condition that can be established depending on the judgment or decision. Not limited to setting suggestion effects, any effect may be one that can be executed at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met or not. The production mode may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are met, or the execution timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether such conditions are satisfied. . In addition, a restriction may be set for an arbitrary performance such that a specific performance is not executed within a range where a preset restriction condition is met, or compared to a range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. A limit may be set such that the execution rate decreases and it is difficult to execute.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 91AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of executing a game, and is capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, for example. For example, a performance execution means such as a microprocessor 91AK100 for performance control, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to character images. and a moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a moving image using the data stored in the first storage area; It includes a character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image specified by text image designation information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-7. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means is capable of changing the second component regarding the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. Good too. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means changes the second component regarding the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6, using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data configuring the color field. It may be possible. This enables appropriate display control to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot", for example, as shown in FIG. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component regarding the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control display so as to prevent increases in data volume and processing load.

When a specific element is set as a character image component, such as when the color field is "gold", for example, as shown in Figure 8-8, a glossy character image is displayed and the character image is It may also be possible to display an effect image added to the surrounding area. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

When a special element is set as a character image component, for example when the color field is "rainbow", for example red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as water, blue, bluish-purple, and red-purple in this order. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 92AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of executing a game, and is capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, for example. For example, a performance execution means such as a microprocessor 91AK100 for performance control, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 that stores data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 that stores data related to character images. A moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a moving image using the data stored in the first storage area, and a moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 or a moving image renderer 91AK144, which controls the display of a character image using the data stored in the second storage area. It includes a character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is a first component such as a text image specified by text image designation information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. and a second moving image different from the first moving image, such as a moving image using moving image data 91AKD11, for example, a text image according to text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, etc. , it is possible to add and display character images using data related to common character images. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means controls the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component in the display period of the character image added to one moving image. The second component may be changeable. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-6, using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data configuring the color field. It may be possible. This enables appropriate display control to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image indicating "super hot," for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be able to individually change and display the first component and the second component regarding the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This makes it possible to display various character images easily and with high quality, and to appropriately control display so as to prevent an increase in data volume and processing load.

When a specific element is set as a character image component, for example, when the color field is "gold", a glossy character image is displayed as shown in Figure 8-8. It may also be possible to add an effect image to the surrounding area and display it. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

When a special element is set as a character image component, for example when the color field is "rainbow", for example red, orange, yellow, green, It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as water, blue, bluish-purple, and red-purple in this order. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the performance by the character image display.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
The configuration related to the feature parts 91AK and 92AK may be combined with part or all of the configuration related to the feature part 60AK as appropriate. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect of a suggestion effect mode, and in a display period of a character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, or a character image using data related to a common character image may be created for the first video image and a second video image different from the first video image. It may be possible to add and display it.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of a screen display in the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, on the screen of the image display device 5, an active display area 01AKA1, a first pending display area 01AKB1, a second pending display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1 are provided.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first pending display area 01AKB1, a pending display is performed in accordance with the first pending storage number by displaying an effect image corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In the second pending display area 01AKB2, a pending display is performed in accordance with the second pending storage number by displaying an effect image corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending. In this way, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first pending display area 01AKB1, and the second pending display area 01AKB2, active display and pending display, which are specific displays, are possible based on information regarding variable display. The hold display in the first hold display area 01AKB1 is also referred to as a "first hold display," and the hold display in the second hold display area 01AKB2 is also referred to as a "second hold display."

For example, the first hold display area 01AKB1 can display holds that are associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end, and the first hold display is aligned to the right. It is only necessary that the display area is configured so that it can be performed. In the second hold display area 01AKB2, for example, hold displays can be displayed that are associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end, and the second hold display is aligned to the left. It is only necessary that the display area is configured so that it can be performed. In the active display area 01AKA1, an active display corresponding to the first pending display that was erased (digested) in the first pending display area 01AKB1 in response to the start of the first special figure game is started, and the second special figure game is started. In response to the start, an active display is started in accordance with the second pending display that was erased (expired) in the second pending display area 01AKB2. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may be one that has the same color and pattern as the first pending display and the second pending display.For example, the active display may be common to the first pending display and the second pending display. The effect image may be displayed larger than each pending display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first pending display or the second pending display by executing the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display, so that the active display can be distinguished from the first hold display and the second hold display.

A small symbol display area 01AKC1 is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small symbol display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end of the screen of the image display device 5, for example. ing. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, variable display of small symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The performance image showing the small design is smaller than the identification information image which is the performance image showing the decorative design, and can be displayed variably in a manner that is partially or completely common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative design. Any reduced identification information image may be used. For example, if an identification information image showing a decorative pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the production image showing a small pattern corresponds to the same pattern number as the part showing the numbers included in the decorative pattern. Since the image is an image showing the number given and does not include a part showing a character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than a production image showing a decorative pattern. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1, by displaying the small symbols in a simple manner, it is sufficient to prevent the player from misrecognizing the display contents and display results of the small symbols. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small symbols serving as reduced identification information is performed, and a determined small symbol serving as a display result is derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times.

FIG. 9-2 shows a configuration example of an effect drawing command. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect drawing commands. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling. Command 01AKG02 is a drawing command that instructs color blending to invert color information. Command 01AKG03 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring by changing magnification. Command 01AKG04 is a drawing command that commands color blending for monochrome conversion. Command 01AKG05 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring by rotation. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command that instructs to change the offset amount of the image position.

The effect drawing command may be prepared as one drawing command or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a group of commands for controlling drawing, and can be created by the CPU 91AK131 as a command string that is a combination of a plurality of commands for the VDP91AK132. The VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing in the order of description in the display list. The effect drawing command may be composed of a combination of commands for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculations. For example, a drawing command that commands color blending may function as a drawing command for each effect by setting parameters according to the effect to be applied. For example, the internal registers of the VDP91AK132 store control data that specifies calculation targets included in the display list, numerical data that specifies parameters, and other register values, and by storing register values according to execution commands, Drawing according to the display list starts.

When executing color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling in response to command 01AKG01, for example, a reduced image is generated by texture mapping using bilinear interpolation on image data. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using the plurality of reduced images thus generated, a combined reduced image is generated by performing a color blending process such as alpha blending. Thereafter, by executing an enlargement process on the combined reduced image, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is blurred.

When executing color blending to invert color information in response to command 01AKG02, for example, the maximum value (for example, 255) and the RGB value, which is the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in the image data, are set. Execute the difference calculation process. For example, if the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", the color information can be inverted by obtaining 255-80=175. By performing the same difference calculation process for the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", the color information contained in the image data is The generated image can be drawn by changing the .

When executing color blending for blurring by changing magnification in response to command 01AKG03, for example, a plurality of enlarged or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as image enlargement and reduction ratios are generated. For example, for an image with a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images are generated, such as an image with a display magnification of 102% and an image with a display magnification of 104%. Using the multiple enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and the image corresponding to the original image data (original image), a color blending process such as alpha blending is performed to perform a blurring process. The generated image can be drawn by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image becomes the same.

When executing color blending for monochrome conversion in response to command 01AKG04, for example, execute monochrome conversion calculation processing for each pixel on RGB values, which are color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in image data. do. In the monochrome conversion calculation process, by substituting RGB values into the calculation formula for color tone conversion, color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome. In this manner, by executing the monochrome conversion calculation process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so that the image is subjected to monochrome conversion.

When performing color blending for blurring by rotation in response to command 01AKG05, for example, a plurality of rotated images are generated by rotation calculation processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images with different image rotation angles are generated. For example, two types of rotated images are generated for an image with a rotation angle of 0 degrees, an image with a rotation angle of 2 degrees, and an image with a rotation angle of 4 degrees. Using the multiple rotated images generated in this way and an image corresponding to the original image data (original image), a color blending process such as alpha blending is performed to create a blurred image. An image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that

When changing the offset amount of the image position in response to the command 01AKG06, the image position information is changed by, for example, coordinate value conversion processing on the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, position information, such as UV coordinate values, when drawing an image is changed in accordance with an offset amount set as a parameter. The UV coordinate value is given as a texture coordinate attribute value when mapping a texture to an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so that the texture arrangement is different.

In this way, the effect drawing commands may include commands such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that change the color information included in the image data so that the generated image can be drawn. Furthermore, the effect drawing commands may include a command, such as command 01AKG06, that enables drawing of an image generated by changing position information corresponding to image data. In addition, the effect drawing command may include a command that changes arbitrary attribute information regarding image data to enable drawing of the generated image.

Unlike these effect drawing commands, the CPU 91AK131 can also generate normal display drawing commands. The normal display drawing command executes a process of drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing the color information included in the image data by not executing a composition process using color blending or the like.

FIG. 9-3 shows a configuration example of a screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are divided into a plurality of display layers and drawn. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for effect images. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Among these, the layer 01AKL1 is a display layer with the highest display priority, and displays an effect image showing a small symbol in the small symbol display area 01AKC1 in a displayable manner. Layer 01AKL2 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL1, and renders an effect image corresponding to pending display or active display so as to be displayable. In addition, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing a pedestal below the active display so that it can be displayed. Layer 01AKL3 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL2, and displays an effect image used for a chance-up effect that increases the chance during reach. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays performance images showing decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Draw as possible. Layer 01AKL5 is a display layer with the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image, etc., which becomes a background image, so that it can be displayed.

The display layer in which the plurality of effect images are arranged is specified, for example, by display priority information included in the display list. In the display list, the effect image placed on layer 01AKL5 is specified as the first drawing target, and then the effect images placed on each display layer are specified as the drawing target in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, and 01AKL1. Good too. Further, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on each of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be set with a Z value that is a depth value used when drawing the respective effect images in a superimposed manner. By setting the Z value using the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be a different value depending on the layer to be drawn. For example, a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned is placed closer (forward) in the Z-axis direction than a display layer to which a larger Z value is assigned, and has a higher image display priority. Just do it like this.

When the VDP91AK132 writes image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to a frame buffer provided in the VRAM91AK147 or the like, the display priority can be determined by performing a Z value comparison operation. At this time, for example, image data of a performance image with a small Z value is written to the frame buffer with priority over image data of a performance image with a large Z value. As a result, a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned has a higher display priority than a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a large Z value is assigned, and from the player's perspective. It can be placed on the near side (front side). On the other hand, a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a large Z value is assigned will have a lower display priority than a presentation image drawn on a display layer to which a small Z value is assigned, and the player will It can be placed on the back side (rear side). Note that the relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be an inverse relationship, and a display layer to which a large value is assigned as a Z value has a higher Z value than a display layer to which a smaller value is assigned as a Z value. It may be arranged on the near side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the rendering process of the effect image according to the display layer is executed, and the display image 01AKD1 including a plurality of effect images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are combined in a superimposed manner as a plurality of display layers having different display priorities.

Among layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. In layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, effect images can be drawn and displayed using a different drawing process from the effect images drawn in layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect drawing synthesis process executed by the VDP91AK132. The effect drawing synthesis process is executed, for example, when a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred based on the result of decoding an instruction code by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of the VDP 91AK132. When the effect drawing synthesis process is started, image data to be subjected to the effect process is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP91AK132, image data to be processed is read out from the effect data memory 91AK123, etc., and stored in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 for temporary storage. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and transfers it to the work area of the VRAM91AK147. Just remember it. The image data to be subjected to the effect processing is designated by the drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on one of the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 among the plurality of display layers.

Thereafter, effect color blending is executed in accordance with the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP91AK132 uses some or all of the video renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 to execute inter-pixel calculation processing specified by the drawing command, so that any of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05, for example, All you have to do is perform color blending accordingly. In the case of command 01AKG06, coordinate value conversion processing may be executed to change the offset amount of the image position in texture mapping.

After step 01AKS02, images are combined and drawn in correspondence with the low priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image for which effect color blending was performed in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of the VRAM91AK147. For example, the VDP91AK132 draws on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by a drawing command using some or all of the video renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. The images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. As a result, images drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing effect color blending. can.

After step 01AKS03, images are combined and drawn in accordance with the high priority display layer (step 01AKS04). For example, in the VDP91AK132, image data to be drawn is read out from the effect data memory 91AK123, etc., and drawn in a frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM91AK147. An image in a low priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer in step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and uses it for screen display in the VRAM91AK147. All you have to do is transfer it to the frame buffer and store it. At this time, some or all of the video image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, thereby drawing on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. The image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04 is specified by a drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer among the plurality of display layers. As a result, images drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which are special layers, can be drawn for screen display without executing color blending for effects and without changing the color information of the image data. I can do it.

In this way, the VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 using the image data stored in the predetermined areas of the effect data memory 91AK123 and the VRAM91AK147. Furthermore, by executing the effect drawing synthesis process, on the one hand, it is possible to change the color information included in the image data and draw the image to be drawn on any of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. On the other hand, an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn in accordance with image data.

When a display list that does not include effect drawing commands but includes normal display drawing commands is transferred, the VDP91AK132 can execute normal drawing synthesis processing that is different from effect drawing synthesis processing. In normal drawing synthesis processing, the data transfer circuit of the VDP91AK132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM91AK147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and transfers it to the VRAM91AK147. The data may be transferred to a frame buffer for screen display and stored. At this time, some or all of the video image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146 execute pixel-to-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, thereby drawing on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. In this case, the image drawn on any of layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, has the color information of the image data changed without executing color blending for effects. It can be drawn for screen display without having to do so.

FIG. 9-5 shows an example of execution of image processing using effect drawing and synthesis processing. In this case, in the display list including effect drawing commands, among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL3, the layer Image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL4 and image data 01AKD05 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL5 are each specified. When the VDP91AK132 reads out these image data in step 91AKS01 of the effect drawing and synthesis process, it stores them in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 provided in the work area of the VRAM91AK147 and temporarily stores them. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL3, the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL4, and the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on layer 01AKL5, Image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in subframe buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP 91AK132 performs effect color blending on the image data stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing and synthesis process. For example, when a color blend for monochrome conversion is specified by command 01AKG04 as an effect drawing command, color information included in the image data is changed by executing monochrome conversion calculation processing. As a result, the color information of the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL3 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL4 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is changed so that it becomes monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2).

Thereafter, the VDP 91AK132 synthesizes images corresponding to the low priority display layer in step 91AKS03 of effect drawing synthesis processing. For example, image data read from the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order from the display layer with the lowest display priority. At this time, it is sufficient to overwrite the image data or erase hidden surfaces depending on the display priority. Among the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Let me remember it. The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL4 is read out second, and is written superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL3 is read out third, and is superimposed and written on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized.

Then, the VDP 91AKD 132 synthesizes images corresponding to the high priority display layer in step 91AKS04 of the effect drawing synthesis process. At this time, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list, image data 01AKD02 of the effect image placed in layer 01AKL2 among layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer is specified first as the image data to be drawn. , image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged in layer 01AKL1 is specified next. Each time the VDP91AK132 reads these image data, it writes and stores them in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL2 is read out first, and is superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. The image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged in the layer 01AKL1 is finally read out and written in a superimposed manner on the image data 01AKD02, 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be synthesized.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 is converted to image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 with color information changed by effect color blending, and the converted image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 is given priority for display. are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the time. Thereafter, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not performing effect color blending. Therefore, 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are drawn using a specific drawing process such as color blending for effects, and display various effects images such as a background image, a effects image showing a decorative pattern, and an effect image that increases chances during reach. It is possible. On the other hand, the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are drawn using normal drawing processing that does not perform color blending for effects, and are used to create effect images that indicate pending display or active display, and effect images that indicate small symbols, etc., for the progress of the game. Related predetermined images can be displayed.

FIG. 9-6 shows an example of an image displayed by executing the effect drawing synthesis process. When a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred, the VDP91AK132 can display a rendering image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing effect drawing synthesis processing. .

FIG. 9-6(A) shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When a display list including the command 01AKG04 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, a production image drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing etc. from the effect color blend is displayed. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for drawing with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, as specific drawing processing, drawing is performed using monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., in which drawing is performed using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data. Images for presentation can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, it is possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by performing normal drawing processing without changing the color information included in the image data.

FIG. 9-6(B) shows image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When a display list including command 01AKG02 is transferred as an effect drawing command, it is possible to display a production image drawn by difference calculation processing among effect color blends in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. It is. The difference calculation process is a process for converting and rendering the value of color information included in image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as a specific drawing process, drawing is performed by a difference calculation process that converts the value of color information included in the image data and draws the image for presentation. can be displayed. In the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, it is possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by performing normal drawing processing without converting the values of color information included in the image data.

In addition, when a display list including command 01AKG01 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, use a composition process that performs color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG03 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, as a specific drawing process, the image data is It is possible to display a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG05 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are combined with image data by a compositing process that performs color blending for blurring by rotation as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display a rendering image drawn with the included color information changed. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the color information included in the image data through normal drawing processing.

When a display list including command 01AKG06 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, image data is converted by coordinate value conversion processing that changes the offset amount of the image position as a specific drawing process. It is possible to display a performance image drawn with the position information corresponding to changed changed. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the position information corresponding to the image data through normal drawing processing.

By using these effect drawing commands, you can draw a presentation image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data, or a presentation image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, on a specific layer. can be displayed. This makes it possible to perform different image processing depending on the effect drawing command, even for production images that are drawn using common image data, so that color information or position information can be changed and drawn. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 9-7(A) shows an example of setting the jackpot reliability according to the contents of the reach effect. The jackpot reliability for each reach performance is the ratio of cases in which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state among the cases in which each reach performance is executed. In this setting example, the jackpot reliability is set to be different depending on the reach effect that is a plurality of types of super reach, such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" is set to differ depending on multiple types of reach effects by assigning a determination value that is compared with the random value for determining the variable display pattern. All you have to do is stay there.

SP Reach A1 to A3 are super reach effects with lower jackpot reliability than SP Reach B, and are also referred to as "weak SP reach." SP Reach B is a super reach effect with higher jackpot reliability than SP Reach A1 to A3, and is also called "Strong SP Reach." For example, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP Reach B is 80%. It is. Therefore, when the SP reach A1 reach effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" about once out of five times. On the other hand, when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" only about 4 times out of 5 times. In the case of SP reach A1 to A3, the reach performance content may include a performance mode in which some commonality can be recognized. For example, a common moving image may be played back and displayed as a background image for SP reach A1 to A3. Alternatively, a common character image may be displayed as an animation for SP reach A1 to A3. The ready-to-reach performance content may include a presentation mode that makes it possible to recognize the difference between the SP reach B and the SP reach A1 to A3. For example, for SP Reach B, a moving image different from that for SP Reach A1 to A3 may be played back and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, in SP Reach B, a character image different from that in SP Reach A1 to A3 may be displayed as an animation. The ready-to-reach performance content may include a presentation mode in which one of SP reach A1 to A3 can be recognized as different from other cases. For example, different moving images may be played back and displayed as background images for SP reach A1 to A3. Alternatively, character images different from each other may be displayed as animations in SP reaches A1 to A3. Other presentation modes that can be used to recognize differences include arbitrary displays on the screen of the image display device 5, arbitrary sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and arbitrary displays using light emitting members such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. Any movement using a movable member for presentation, or a combination of some or all of these may be used.

When a super reach effect such as SP reach A1 to A3 is executed, a case where a drawing effect is executed by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is included. As the drawing effect, it may be possible to select and execute one of a plurality of types of display effects that can display images drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command. As a drawing effect, an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command is not displayed, but even if it is possible to execute a display effect that can display an image drawn in response to a drawing command different from the effect drawing command. good. When a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed, even if it includes a case where an effect is executed by displaying an image drawn only in response to a normal display drawing command without executing a specific drawing effect. good.

FIG. 9-7(B) shows an example of setting the drawing effect contents according to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are prepared in advance as a plurality of drawing effect patterns. Depending on these plurality of drawing effect patterns, some or all of the drawing effect contents are different. The content of the drawing effect includes the presence or absence and type of the drawing effect by effect display, and the presence or absence of the drawing effect by strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include effect display or strobe display is also referred to as a normal drawing effect. A drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display is also referred to as a specific drawing effect.

The effect display is an effect display in which color information included in image data is changed and drawn when an effect drawing command is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include a monochrome conversion effect and a color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect uses command 01AKG04 among the effect drawing commands to draw and display a monochrome-converted effect image. The color information inversion effect uses command 02 of the effect drawing commands to draw and display an effect image with color information inverted. In this way, the effect display may be performed as long as it can display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. Note that the effect display may be capable of displaying an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, for example, using command 01AKG06 among the effect drawing commands.

A strobe display is an effect display that alternately and repeatedly displays an image drawn using image data and a single-color image (for example, black or white) with settings different from the image data, every predetermined number of frames. It is. Strobe display may be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, strobe display may not be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers. In this way, while strobe display can be executed within the range of images drawn on a specific layer, a limit may be set such that strobe display cannot be executed within the range of images drawn on a special layer. A temporary stop display may be performed together with the strobe display. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect by displaying the images has been temporarily stopped by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. Note that when strobe display is not performed, temporary stop display may be performed.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of determining a drawing effect pattern. For example, in the effect control process processing in step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, multiple drawings are performed at a ratio according to the variable display result and the content of the reach effect as shown in FIG. 9-8. It is sufficient if one of the performance patterns can be determined. When a variable display pattern corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach is specified, the CPU91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining a drawing effect pattern, and based on the random number value, depending on the variable display result and the content of the reach effect, The drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in Figure 9-8, if the variable display result is "lose" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it will be drawn at a rate of 60% (=60/100). The rendering effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, the rendering effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the rendering effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and the rendering effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=5 /100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, the proportion of 10% (=10/100) determines the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11, and the proportion of 5% (5/100) determines the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12. be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "Jackpot" and the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (=5/100). , the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 15% (=15/100), and the rate of 20% (=20/100) The drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, the drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (=30/100). Due to such determination ratios, the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and is controlled to a jackpot game state is different between the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01.

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern in which a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display, is not executed. On the other hand, drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are patterns for executing specific drawing effects using one or both of effect display and strobe display. When the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is more effective than when the variable display result is a "loss". The proportion of drawing performance patterns other than those determined is high. Therefore, when the reach effect content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, when a specific drawing effect that is a drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display is executed, it is more effective than when the specific drawing effect is not executed. , the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases. In addition, the determination ratio of the drawing performance patterns other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than that of the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

When the ready-to-reach effect content is SP reach-B, only drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 can be determined, and a restriction is set so that drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 cannot be determined. When the reach effect content is SP reach B, a super reach effect is executed which is a "strong SP reach" with higher jackpot reliability than in the case of SP reach A1 to A3. In such a case, if a specific drawing effect using an effect display or a strobe display is executed, it will be difficult for the player to visually recognize the super reach effect, which has a high probability of hitting the jackpot, and this may reduce the player's enjoyment of the game. be. Therefore, within the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, a limit is set in which a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being obstructed from the player's attention to the reach performance of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, and to appropriately improve the game interest.

When the reach effect content is one of SP reach A1 to A3, it is possible to determine one of the drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 at different ratios depending on the variable display result. . When the reach performance content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, a super reach reach performance is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than in the case of SP reach B. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance using an effect display or a strobe display is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases. In this way, when the reach performance content is one of SP reach A1 to A3, the specific drawing performance is executed and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state increases, so the super reach with low jackpot reliability Even if it is a reach effect, the execution of the specific drawing effect can increase the player's expectations and appropriately improve the interest in the game.

Note that even when the ready-to-reach effect content is SP reach-B, it may be possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the ready-to-reach presentation content is SP ready-to-win B, it may be possible to determine a drawing presentation pattern other than 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the ready-to-reach presentation content is SP ready-to-reach A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach B, there is a limit that specific drawing effects using effect display and strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than in the range where the reach effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. Restrictions may be set as follows.

FIG. 9-9(A) shows the performance execution period in the variable display of super reach. When the super reach variable display is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display can be divided into a plurality of performance execution periods such as performance execution periods D0 to D4. The performance execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display until the execution of the ready-to-win performance is started after the ready-to-win performance is established. The performance execution period D1 is a period from the start of the ready-to-reach performance execution period in which the super reach performance is executed until the start of the chance-up performance execution period in which the chance-up performance can be executed. The performance execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance up performance execution period to the end of the chance up performance execution period until the start of the result notification performance execution period in which the result notification performance can be executed. The result notification performance may be any performance that notifies a performance result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in a reach performance that becomes a super reach. The performance execution period D3 is a period from the start to the end of the result notification performance execution period. The performance execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification performance execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 9-9(B) shows performance control example 02AKC01 in each performance execution period. Among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period, if the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is executed. become executable. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, so even in the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable.

Among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D0 from the start of variable display to the start of the super reach reach performance, regardless of whether the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable. For example, in the production execution period D0, if it is possible to perform a light emission production using the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to the BGM and sound effect output when the variable display of decorative symbols starts. good. In addition, during the performance execution period D0, decorative symbols may be stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and ” When the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous eye are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are activated in response to the BGM and sound effect output. It may also be possible to perform a light emitting effect using. In addition, during the entire performance execution period D0, the normal drawing performance NOR is executed, and in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are used to emit light. It may be possible to perform the performance.

Among the performance execution periods D1 to D4 in which the super reach reach performance etc. are executed during the execution of the variable display, in the performance execution period D1 following the performance execution period D0, the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01 is selected. Regardless of whether this is the case, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR becomes executable. In the performance execution period D2 which is after the performance execution period D1, the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed when the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is used, and the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01. be. In the normal drawing effect NOR using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. In the specific drawing effect SPE using a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01, it is possible to display images drawn by specific drawing processing, for example, in specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5. Note that even when a specific drawing effect SPE using a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01 is executed, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing, for example.

In the performance execution period D3 and the performance execution period D4 after the performance execution period D2, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR is performed, regardless of whether it is the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 or a drawing performance pattern other than 02AKA01. becomes executable. In addition, in the effect execution period D3, similarly to the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed when the drawing effect pattern is 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed when the drawing effect pattern is other than 02AKA01. It may be. If the specific drawing effect SPE is made executable in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is changed to normal drawing in the effect execution period D4 for notifying the finalized decorative pattern etc. that will be a variable display result. What is necessary is to return to the execution of the effect NOR. Further, the specific drawing effect SPE may be made executable during all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Prior to the variable display in which the reach effect of super reach is executed, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE can be started based on the determination result that the reach effect of super reach will be executed as a judgment result at the time of starting winning. You can do it like this. Even if the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, in the same way as when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2, for example, in the specific layer 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, It is sufficient if it is possible to display images drawn by specific drawing processing, and for example, in layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, images drawn by normal drawing processing can be displayed.

Among the plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed even in a period other than the performance execution period D0, a light emitting performance using light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs is performed. It is doable. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, the light emission effect is controlled not to be executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect may be prevented from being executed by turning off the light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs. In this way, when the normal drawing effect NOR that can display images drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9. On the other hand, when a specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying an image drawn by specific drawing processing is executed, a light emission effect by a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the performance execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR that can display images drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, it is possible to execute the light emission effect by emitting light from the light emitting member, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process is In the range of the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE capable of displaying is executed, a restriction is set as a limit that the light emission performance by light emission of the light emitting member is not performed. When a specific drawing effect SPE using effect display or strobe display is executed, by not executing the light emitting effect, an appropriate image that allows the player to easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process is created. The display can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 etc., the restriction is not limited to not executing the light emission effect by light emission of the light emitting member, for example, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. Restrictions may be placed on the presentation mode of the light emitting effect, such as reducing the amount of light emitting effect compared to when the light emitting effect is used. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, a restriction is applied to reduce the amount of effect by lowering the amount of light emitted from the light emitting member in the light emitting effect (brightness) than when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the number of light emitting members that can emit light in the light emission effect than when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the luminous color used in the light emitting effect (for example, monochrome light emission) than when the normal drawing process NOR is executed. Limits may be set as follows.

FIGS. 9-10 to 9-13 show examples of execution of reach effects and drawing effects. FIGS. 9-10 shows an example of performance execution when the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is determined among the cases where a reach performance that becomes a super reach is executed. FIG. 9-11 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 9-12 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 9-13 shows an example of performance execution in the performance execution period D2 when the drawing performance pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 9-10(A) shows an example of production execution 02AKM01 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a ready-to-win mode and a ready-to-win is established. At this time, a reach is established when the common decorative symbols corresponding to the number "7" are all stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. , the normal reach reach effect is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM01, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect can be appropriately executed in response to the effect execution period D0. For example, it is only necessary that it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect using light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect outputs from reach establishment to super reach development.

FIG. 9-10(B) shows a performance execution example 02AKM02 in a case where the normal reach performance becomes a reach development in which the reach performance shifts to the super reach performance in response to the start of the performance execution period D1. 9-10(C) and FIG. 9-10(D) show performance execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the reach performance of super reach progresses in the performance execution period D1. In the case of production execution examples 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, it is possible to perform the normal drawing production NOR with the light emission production regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and the specific drawing production Do not run SPE.

FIG. 9-10(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM05 when the chance-up performance during reach is executed in the performance execution period D2. FIG. 9-10(F) shows a performance execution example 02AKM06 when a reach-for-win performance is executed after a chance-up performance in the performance execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM05 and 02AKM06, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect based on the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed corresponding to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since the drawing effect pattern is 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (G) shows a performance execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification performance is executed during the performance execution period D3. At this time, as a super reach effect, a reach effect with different effect contents depending on the variable display result is executed, and also in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the finalized decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by oscillating display or the like. In the case of production execution example 02AKM07, corresponding to the production execution period D3, the normal drawing production NOR with light emission production can be executed regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and the specific drawing production SPE can be executed. Not executed.

FIG. 9-10 (H) shows an example of performance execution 02AKM08 when the final notification of the variable display result is executed during the performance execution period D4. At this time, as the reach effect of super reach ends, the determined decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed. In the case of production execution example 02AKM08, corresponding to the production execution period D4, it is possible to execute the normal drawing production NOR accompanied by the light emission production regardless of the determination result of the drawing production pattern, and to execute the specific drawing production SPE. Not executed.

FIG. 9-11(A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM11 when a chance-up performance during reach is executed in response to the start of the performance execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05. However, the temporary stop display may be started in response to the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, images drawn in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, may be copied to a copy area provided in the VRAM91AK147 and stored in a reusable manner. Further, in response to execution of the specific drawing effect SPE using strobe display, control is performed so as not to execute the light emission effect.

FIG. 9-11(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM12 in which strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM11. In the case of production execution example 02AKM12, an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-11(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM13 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM12, an effect display that becomes a pause display during strobe display is executed. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM13, it is sufficient if the pause display can be executed during strobe display by repeating the pause display started in effect execution example 02AKM11. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, by drawing an image read from the copy area of the VRAM91AK147, the same image as in the production execution example 02AKM11 may be temporarily stopped and repeatedly displayed.

FIG. 9-11(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM14 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM13, images similar to effect execution example 02AKM12 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11(E) shows effect execution example 02AKM15 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM14, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM16 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM15, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11 (G) shows effect execution example 02AKM17 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM16, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-11 (H) shows effect execution example 02AKM18 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM17, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16 are repeatedly displayed. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, it is possible to perform pause display as well as strobe display. . After the strobe display of effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the execution returns to the normal drawing effect NOR, and control is performed to execute the light emission effect.

Such strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data, using an image with settings different from the image data, in response to a drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a strobe display in response to a drawing command, the normal drawing effect NOR is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since different impressions can be given, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest.

FIG. 9-12 (A) shows that when the reach chance up effect is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, a specific drawing effect SPE with a monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed. This shows a production execution example 02AKM21. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., which are specific drawing processing, are displayed. are doing.

FIG. 9-12(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM22 in which a strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM21. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM22, similarly to performance execution example 02AKM12, an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-12 (C) shows effect execution example 02AKM23 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM22, a specific drawing effect SPE with a monochrome conversion effect according to drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed during execution of the chance-up effect during reach. It shows. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM23, it is sufficient if the chance-up performance during reach that was started in performance execution example 02AKM21 can be continued. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE using the monochrome conversion effect, even when strobe display is executed, by displaying an image drawn using image data read out according to the elapsed time, as in the case of effect execution example 02AKM05, The temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-12(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM24 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM23, images similar to the effect execution example 02AKM22 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-12(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM25 where, following performance execution example 02AKM24, a ready-to-win performance after a chance-up performance is executed in performance execution period D2. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM06 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing, etc., which are specific drawing processing, are displayed. are doing.

FIG. 9-12(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM26 in which images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24 are repeatedly displayed following effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 9-12 (G) shows a performance execution example 02AKM27 in which a ready-to-win performance after the performance execution example 02AKM25 in the performance execution period D2 is executed following the performance execution example 02AKM26. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM25 can be continued. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or a temporary stop display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM28 in which, following effect execution example 02AKM27, images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26 are repeatedly displayed. In this way, a monochrome-converted image drawn by reducing the number of colors in the color information through monochrome conversion calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying this, it is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a monochrome conversion effect in addition to strobe display.

The effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, uses a dedicated image using an image drawn with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data, in response to the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is executable regardless of data. As a result, even for effect images drawn using common image data, it is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a monochrome conversion effect according to the effect drawing command, which is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since the impression given to the player can be made different, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and while preventing the amount of image data from increasing, the display effect It is possible to enhance the impression of the player and improve the interest in the game.

In FIG. 9-13(A), when the on-reach chance up effect is executed in response to the start of the effect execution period D2, a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed. The effect execution example 02AKM31 is shown. In comparison with the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM05, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the color information value by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. The difference is that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(B) shows effect execution example 02AKM32 in which strobe display is executed following effect execution example 02AKM31. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM32, similarly to effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, it is sufficient that the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

FIG. 9-13 (C) is an example of performance execution in which, following performance execution example 02AKM32, a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect according to drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is executed during the execution of the reach chance up effect. 02AKM33 is shown. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM33, it is only necessary to continue executing the chance up performance during reach that was started in performance execution example 02AKM31. Note that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE using the color information inversion effect, even when a strobe display is executed, as in the case of effect execution example 02AKM05, by displaying an image drawn using image data read out according to the elapsed time. , the temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-13(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM34 in which, following the effect execution example 02AKM33, images similar to the effect execution example 02AKM32 are repeatedly displayed. FIG. 9-13(E) shows performance execution example 02AKM35 in which, following performance execution example 02AKM34, a ready-to-win performance after a chance-up performance is executed in performance execution period D2. Compared to the effect display in effect execution example 02AKM06, the effect display at this time is an image rendered by converting the color information value by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. The difference is that is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(F) shows effect execution example 02AKM36, which repeatedly displays images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034, following effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 9-13 (G) shows performance execution example 02AKM37 when a ready-to-win performance after performance execution example 02AKM35 in the performance execution period D2 is executed following performance execution example 02AKM36. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM35 can be continued. Note that the temporary stop display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or the temporary stop display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13 (H) shows effect execution example 02AKM38, which repeatedly displays images similar to effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36, following effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, an image with inverted color information, which is drawn by converting color information values through differential calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data are alternately and repeatedly switched. By displaying this, it is possible to perform a strobe display and a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information inversion effect.

The effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, uses dedicated image data using an image drawn by converting the color information included in the image data in accordance with the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. It is executable regardless of the situation. As a result, even for effect images drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using a color information inversion effect in response to an effect drawing command, it is possible to perform a specific drawing effect SPE with a color information inversion effect, which is different from the normal drawing effect NOR. Since the impressions given to the player can be made different, it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing and to perform various display effects to improve the game's interest. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a color information inversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color changes in the displayed image. It is possible to enhance the impression of the performance and improve the interest in the game.

By executing the specific drawing performance SPE using effect display or strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort due to the display performance, which is not present in the normal drawing performance NOR. When the reach performance content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, a super reach reach performance is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than when it is SP reach B. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of discomfort in the display effect, which is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state increases, so that the player's expectation can be increased and the game interest can be appropriately improved.

The invention regarding the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features regarding the feature parts 01AK and 02AK, but may have the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the conventional technology. It may also include a part of it.

The strobe display has been described as being executed by repeatedly switching and displaying an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such strobe display, part or all of a single color image may be replaced with a specific image prepared in advance. For example, when inserting and displaying a performance image that becomes a character image as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot" and is controlled to a jackpot game state, rather than when a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content and determination ratio of the drawing effect pattern may be set so that the ratio becomes high.

The description has been made assuming that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emission effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display portion of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmittance is provided on the near side (front side) of a part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, a light-emitting member such as a light-guide plate LED is provided near the light-guide plate, and light from the light-emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light-guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light-guide plate. In this case, a light emitting display effect that displays a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. In the performance execution period in which the normal drawing performance NOR is executed in accordance with the drawing performance pattern, it is sufficient if the light emission display performance can be executed based on the determination result of the light emission display performance pattern. On the other hand, in response to a drawing effect pattern or the like, the light emitting display effect may be controlled not to be executed during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing a button light emitting section mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, it is only necessary that the button light emitting effect can be executed based on the determination result of the button light emitting effect pattern, etc. during the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern. On the other hand, the button light emission effect may be controlled not to be executed during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the layer 01AKL2, which displays and renders an effect image corresponding to a pending display or an active display, may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In the setting where layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect image corresponding to the pending display or active display is drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, so that color information etc. may be changed. When a specific drawing performance SPE using a monochrome conversion effect is executed, it is only necessary that the performance image corresponding to the pending display or active display can be changed to a monochrome image with a small number of colors and displayed. While enabling such monochrome display of pending display and active display, if it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display color of a specific display related to variable display such as pending display and active display, specific drawing effect SPE If a change effect is executed during the execution of , the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. The display color of the specific display may be different depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot gaming state. When the change effect includes a success pattern that changes the display color of a specific display and a failure pattern that does not change the display color of the specific display, the change effect of the successful pattern is executed during execution of the specific drawing effect SPE, When the display color of the specific display changes to a specific color, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is started at the timing when the pending display is displayed, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the pending display are performed, the change effect of the success pattern is executed, and the display color of the active display is changed. When the color changes to a specific color, execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer may be included in which an effect image or the like indicating the direction in which the game ball is launched can be displayed. For example, in the direction display layer, when a firing promotion performance is executed as an operation promotion performance for a left-handed performance or a right-handed performance, a performance image that urges the game ball to be fired towards the left side game area or the right side game area is displayed. It is sufficient if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko game machine 1, games can be played by firing game balls as game media, and a first route and a second route are provided as movement routes along which the game balls can flow. The first route may be a right-handed route that becomes the right-hand game area in the gaming area, and the second route may be a left-handed area that becomes the left-hand game area in the game area. Then, when the first state is such that it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the first path, a first promotion image that urges the game medium to be launched toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. That's fine. In addition, when the second state is such that it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the second path, a second promotion image is displayed that urges the game medium to be launched toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It may be possible to draw and display on the direction display layer. In this way, by including the direction display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the specific layer can display an image drawn by the specific drawing process, whereas the direction display layer can display the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the effect image that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side game area or the right side game area may be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display images that prompt the firing of game media using normal rendering processing rather than specific rendering processing, a variety of display effects can be performed while ensuring appropriate visibility of the images that prompt the firing of gaming media. Thus, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As the operation promotion effect, it may be possible to draw and display an effect image that shows a changeable effect output amount, such as a part or all of the volume, screen brightness, and light emission amount. As a display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer may be included in which an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect is drawn in a displayable manner.

The display layer included in the special layer may include a warning display layer that displays a warning image or the like to notify the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the warning display layer, detection is performed by various sensors connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1, such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door open sensor, a big winning opening door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball out sensor. If it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the state of detection of game balls by the starting port switch, count switch, etc., a warning image will be drawn and displayed according to the error that has occurred. Good if possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer with the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer, whereas the warning display layer can display the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality may be displayed as a predetermined image related to the game, as long as it can be drawn and displayed in a special layer using normal drawing processing. By being able to draw and display a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality while providing a variety of display effects. By doing so, you can increase your enjoyment of the game. When reporting the occurrence of an abnormality, the abnormality light emission notification may be performed by causing a light emitting member to emit light even during execution of a specific drawing effect SPE in which no light emission effect is executed. In this way, notification regarding the occurrence of an abnormality may be performed with higher priority than other effects.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer that displays a presentation image in a setting suggestion presentation may be included. For example, the suggestion display layer only needs to be able to draw and display setting suggestion images determined at different rates depending on the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player, and as a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting value, it is possible to decide whether or not to execute or not to perform the performance depending on the setting value. It is sufficient if it is possible to execute setting suggestion performances with different determination ratios. For example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of setting suggestion images at different rates depending on the setting value, and to draw and display the selected setting suggestion image on the suggestion display layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the special layer, during the effect execution period when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer, whereas the suggestion display layer is The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. By being able to draw and display images that suggest setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 on a special layer using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to display images that suggest setting values that have different advantages for players. It is possible to perform a variety of display effects while appropriately ensuring visibility, thereby improving the interest in the game. Alternatively, the suggestion display layer may be included in a specific layer instead of a special layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the specific layer, during the performance execution period when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the special layer can display the image drawn by the normal drawing process, whereas the suggestion display layer can display the image drawn by the normal drawing process. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by specific drawing processing. By being able to draw and display images that suggest setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on a specific layer using specific drawing processing, it is possible to diversify the display of images that suggest setting values that have different advantages for players. , it is possible to improve the game's interest.

At least some of the features of the pachinko game machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of application to this slot machine, when it is possible to control the navigation notification that notifies the player of the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result to the assist time (also referred to as AT), which is the executable notification period. As the navigation notification, an effect image that informs the stopping order in a recognizable manner may be displayed on the screen of the image display device. In this case, the display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that displays an effect image used for navigation notification. For example, in the notification display layer, if you want to notify the order in which to stop the variable display by each reel on the left center right, if it is possible to draw and display a stop order image showing the order of stop operations using the stop switch on the notification display layer. good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the specific layer can display images drawn by specific drawing processing, whereas the notification display layer can display images drawn by specific drawing processing. The display layer only needs to be able to display images drawn by normal drawing processing. The visibility of the image that informs the operation mode when stopping the variable display in a slot machine can be drawn and displayed on a special layer using normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing. It is possible to improve the game's interest by performing various display performances while appropriately ensuring the following.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 01AK)
This embodiment includes the following inventions. In other words, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that can execute a game, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-171129, an effect image can be displayed based on instructions from a display list. Techniques for making it possible to display images by tilting them, and techniques for gaming machines that draw processed images in which a plurality of deformed images generated using inverted images are arranged, such as those described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2012-29947, etc. was also proposed. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, there was a risk that the visibility of important images would be reduced because the entire image was changed. Therefore, our aim is to provide a gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment while ensuring appropriate image visibility.
The gaming machine related to the feature section 01AK is a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can execute games, and uses a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 or a VRAM91AK147, and the image data. An image processing means, such as VDP91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing, and the image processing means performs normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to a normal display drawing command, which draws in accordance with image data, and At least, it is possible to perform specific drawing processing such as drawing by changing the color information included in image data, for example, drawing processing according to an effect drawing command, and it is possible to execute a specific drawing process such as drawing by changing the color information included in image data, and it is possible to execute a specific drawing process such as drawing processing that changes color information included in image data, for example, drawing processing according to an effect drawing command. Images in each layer can be displayed, and the plurality of layers include specific layers such as layers AKL03 to AKL05, and special layers such as layers AKL01 and AKL02 that have a higher priority than the specific layers, for example. With steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, it is possible to display an image for effect by drawing with a specific drawing process in a specific layer, and for example, with step 01AKS04, with a special layer, it is possible to draw with a normal drawing process and display images related to the progress of the game. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity, appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and make it possible to perform performances using a variety of displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may be performed by converting the value of color information included in the image data and drawing (for example, color information inversion). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in production control example 02AKC01, there is a first period (for example, production execution period D1, etc.) in which specific drawing processing is not executed, such as production execution period D1, and a second period in which specific drawing processing is executed, such as production execution period D2. Among a plurality of periods including a period (for example, the performance execution period D2, etc.), the light emitting means may be allowed to emit light during the first period, and the light emitting means may not be allowed to emit light during the second period. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, a first period (such as a performance execution period D1) in which a specific drawing process is not executed, such as a performance execution period D1, and a second period (for example, a performance execution period D2) during which a specific drawing process is executed, such as a performance execution period D2. etc.), in the first period it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a normal mode, and in the second period, the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted more than in the normal mode. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, the setting value changing process S6A can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, values from 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player. It is equipped with a setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A), and provides a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, for example, settings such as effects according to effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. It is possible to perform a suggestive effect (for example, the effect according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12), and an image drawn by specific drawing processing may not be displayed as an image displayed by the setting suggestive effect. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, the setting value changing process S6A can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, values from 1 to 6) that have different advantages for the player. The system is equipped with a setting means such as a CPU 103 (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A), and provides a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, for example, a setting suggestion such as an effect using effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12. It is possible to execute a performance (for example, a performance using the performance execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12), and it may be possible to display an image drawn by a specific drawing process as an image displayed by the setting suggestion performance. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of images, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific rendering performance that causes the image to be temporarily stopped and displayed, such as a specific rendering performance using the rendering performance pattern 02AKA02 (for example, a specific rendering performance using the rendering performance pattern 02AKA02). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in the effect execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochromatic image in a specific layer (for example, see effect execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, Variable display of the identification information image, such as the variable display of decorative patterns in 5R), and reduction in a mode that is smaller than the identification information image, such as the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1. It is possible to perform variable display of the identification information image (for example, variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 01AKC1), and for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is drawn and displayed using a specific drawing process. It is possible, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 02AK)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 02AK is a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can execute games, and uses a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 and a VRAM91AK147, and the image data. It is equipped with an image processing means, such as VDP91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing, and is equipped with a specific performance such as a super reach performance that suggests control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot game state. can be executed during variable display, and the performance patterns of the specific performance are a first pattern, such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, and a second pattern, such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA02, which have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state. Among the performance periods in which the specific performance is performed, at least during the first period, such as the performance execution period D1, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing performance. It is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing such as drawing processing according to the drawing command of In the second period, in the case of the first pattern, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing, and in the case of the second pattern, for example, specific drawing processing such as drawing processing according to a drawing command during a specific drawing effect can be displayed. It is possible to display images drawn by . As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity, make it possible to perform performances using a variety of displays, appropriately raise the player's expectations, and improve his/her interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may include drawing using fewer colors than the color information included in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may be performed by converting the value of color information included in the image data, such as color information inversion, for example. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, as in the effect control example 02AKC01, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using a light emitting means in response to displaying an image drawn by normal drawing processing in a specific effect, and to display an image drawn by a specific drawing process in a specific effect. Correspondingly, the light emitting effect may not be executed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in response to displaying an image drawn by normal drawing processing in a specific production, it is possible to execute a light emission production by the light emitting means in a normal mode, and in response to displaying an image drawn by specific drawing processing in a specific production, The light emitting effect may be more limited than in the normal mode. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, is provided, It is possible to carry out a setting suggestion effect, such as the effect using effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is displayed in a specific manner, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by a specific drawing process. The image may not be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, is provided, and the setting means is provided. It is possible to perform a setting suggestion performance such as a presentation using production execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, in which a suggestion regarding the setting of the means is displayed in a specific manner, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion performance is drawn by a specific drawing process. It may also be possible to display images. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to perform an effect in which the image is temporarily stopped and displayed in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect using the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochrome image in the case of the second pattern, as in the production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. Thereby, while preventing an increase in data capacity, it is possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, the variable display of the identification information image, such as the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to variably display a reduced identification information image in a form that is smaller than the identification information image, for example, as shown in Figure 9-5, the identification information image can be displayed by specific drawing processing. The reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image, and to make it possible to perform effects using various displays, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK may be combined with some or all of the configurations regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK, the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK, etc., as appropriate. For example, in a configuration in which an operation performance to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion performance that is an operation performance in a suggestion performance mode, in a display period of a character image added to a first moving image, the first component and the second component can be changed, or a character image using data regarding a common character image is added to the first video image and a second video image different from the first video image. In a configuration that can be displayed using a specific layer, it is possible to display a performance image by drawing using a specific drawing process, and in a special layer that has a higher priority than the specific layer, drawing using a normal drawing process, It may be possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game, and in a second period after the first period, it is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing in the case of the first pattern, It may be possible to display an image drawn by specific drawing processing when the second pattern has a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first pattern.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 75SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 having the feature section 75SG in this embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 10-1 to 10-26. FIG. 10-1 is a front view showing the pachinko game machine as the feature part 75SG. FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as the feature section 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko game machine as the feature part 75SG. FIG. 10-4 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located will be defined as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction will be defined as the rear. Further, the explanation will be made with reference to the up, down, right and left directions as seen from the player located in front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. Furthermore, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as in the embodiment described above, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 includes a game board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame 3 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) that supports and fixes the game board 2. (also referred to as underframe 3). A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired and hit into this game area Y from a predetermined ball launcher. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is rotatably provided on the gaming machine frame 3 around the left side, and the gaming area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of a transparent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has obstacle nails (not shown) on the front surface of the game board. , a guide rail 211, an outer rail decoration 212, etc. are provided, and a spacer member 201 is integrally attached to the back side of the board 200. The game board 2 is made of a non-transparent material such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It may be configured as follows.

An opening 2c is formed in the board 200 and spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5 provided at a position away from the game board 2 on the back side can be viewed from the player's side through the opening 2c. It can be viewed from the front side. Further, an area in the display area of the image display device 5 that overlaps with the board 200 is made visible through the board 200.

In addition, a center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board 200, and the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211, and the outer rail decoration 212 is the downstream area of the game ball in the game area Y. has been done. Further, a light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by the center decorative frame 51.

A first presentation unit 300 is provided at a lower position on the back side of the board 200, that is, at a position below the image display device 5. A second presentation unit 400 is provided on the right side of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A third presentation unit 600 is provided above the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, that is, at a position corresponding to the top of the display area of the image display device 5. A fourth presentation unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board 200, that is, at the upper left position of the image display device 5. Further, at the lower right side position of the board 200, a variable winning ball unit 700 is provided in which game balls flowing down the gaming area Y can win prizes.

The first production unit 300 and the fourth production unit 800 are provided on the back side of the board 200, so that they can be seen through the board 200 from the player side (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001). ing. On the other hand, the second presentation unit 400 and the third presentation unit 600 are located at least in front of the game board surface, which is the front surface of the board board 200, and are arranged in the opening 2c, so that the light guide plate device It is visible from the player side through the light guide plate 501 of 500.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 10-6, (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main parts of the light guide plate device, (B) is a BB sectional view of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main parts of (B). It is. Note that here, to aid understanding, the light-emitting region 506 is shown in dots (halftone dots), and the non-light-emitting region 507 without dots (halftone dots) is shown in white.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 that is provided so as to be closed except for the right side and lower area of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51; An LED board 503 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 are mounted for inputting light into the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and a condenser for condensing the light from the light guide plate LEDs 502 toward the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. It mainly has an optical lens 504. Note that the light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 and the center decorative frame 51.

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member made of a material such as a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate and has a predetermined front-to-back width dimension (plate thickness = approximately 5 mm), as shown in FIG. 10-4. It is arranged in front of the third presentation unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a.

The light guide plate 501 also includes a light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface. , a light-emitting region that emits light by light that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501 (see the halftone dot area in FIGS. A non-light emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, it does not emit light due to the light incident inside the light guide plate 501. and a non-emissive region (see the white region in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6(A)).

The light emitting region 506 is formed so that a figure with a radial edge appears at approximately the center of the light guide plate 501. When light enters the inside of the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light and directs it forward. By emitting light, a predetermined image is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by emitting light.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6(B) and (C), the light emitting region 506 has a fine uneven state so that the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 that is incident inside from the right end surface 501a is guided and emitted from the front surface. (Rough surface) is formed on the back side. Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed into an uneven state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a cross-sectional view when viewed from the side in the direction in which light travels. In FIG. 10-6(C), the uneven state (rough surface) is enlarged to help understanding, but the actual light-emitting region 506 is so small that it is difficult to see it with the naked eye. The surface is uneven.

When light enters the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of recesses 510 formed in the light emitting region 506 (see FIG. (See halftone area in 10-5). In other words, the light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is formed by the plurality of recesses 510. This is an area where a dot pattern is formed, and is a non-second area where a predetermined light guide pattern is not formed, which reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface. The light emitting area 507 is an area where a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG, a predetermined image (figure) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to these, decorations such as pictures, characters, symbols, designs, or patterns are also used. It may also be possible to display other display information.

Note that when the light guide plate 501 is in a state where no light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the entire light guide plate 501 including the light emitting area 506 is in a colorless and transparent state, and the display image of the rear image display device 5 and the The second presentation unit 400 and the third presentation unit 600 can be visually recognized (see through) from the front of the light guide plate 501. Further, when light is incident from the right end surface 501a, a portion of the light emitting region 506 emits light, but a portion other than the light emitting region 506 remains colorless and transparent.

Note that in the characteristic portion 75SG, the light emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state having a substantially semicircular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting region 506 is formed on a light guide plate by a stamper or injection It may also be constructed using a molding method in which a concave and convex portion is formed on the back surface (rear surface) of 501. In addition, the reflective part can be constructed using a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed with white ink on an acrylic plate, an adhesive dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with dot-shaped adhesive material, or a groove processing method. It's okay.

Note that in the characteristic portion 75SG, the shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 is approximately semicircular in cross-sectional view, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 can be modified in various ways, such as a substantially triangular shape, as long as it constitutes a reflective surface that can reflect light toward the front (front surface).

The condensing lens 504 is formed of a light-transmitting member such as acrylic or polycarbonate into a long plate shape extending in the vertical direction. On the surface of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504, a plurality of semicircular convex portions 504A that bulge toward the light guide plate 501 side when viewed from the front are formed continuously in the vertical direction. The condenser lens 504 is composed of a single member integrally provided with a plurality of convex portions 504A. One convex portion 504A is formed corresponding to each of the light guide plate LEDs 502.

Note that the convex portions 504A are not limited to one-to-one correspondence to the light guide plate LEDs 502, and for example, one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. Furthermore, the condenser lens 504 is not limited to being composed of a single member in which the plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided. May be used.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(C), the longitudinal width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the longitudinal width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. Furthermore, the front-rear width of the light guide plate 501 side of the condenser lens 504 is approximately the same as the front-rear width of the light-receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, so that the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. The light is incident on the light guide plate 501 without any light leakage.

The front surface of the condensing lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines rearward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the condensing lens 504 is formed from the light guide plate LED 502 side to the light guide plate 501 side. It is a flat slope that gradually slopes forward toward the 501 side. That is, the condensing lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape whose thickness gradually decreases from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

Further, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the distance between the gaps is large enough to prevent the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from coming into contact even if vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being damaged by vibrations that occur during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 will be explained. The light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 is incident on a condenser lens 504 . Here, since the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape to form a lens surface, even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 has high directivity, it enters the condenser lens 504. The light is radially diffused in the left-right direction within the condenser lens 504. Then, when the light incident on the condenser lens 504 passes through the inner curved lens surface, it is refracted toward the right and exits.

Thereby, even if the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be radially diffused to some extent by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting area in the light guide plate 501 is It becomes possible to expand. In addition, since the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (because it is suppressed from spreading radially), only the portion corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can emit light. In addition, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 from the light guide plate LED 502 is repeatedly totally reflected in the front-rear direction, and is condensed toward the approximately central position in the front-rear direction. The light is emitted from the end face on the 501 side (the part with the smallest front-to-back width).

With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be focused and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-back direction. In particular, even if the front-to-back width of the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-to-back width of the light guide plate LED 502 side of the condenser lens 504, the light guide plate can be used without diffusing the light from the light guide plate LED 502 in the front-back direction. 501, it is possible to prevent the light from the light guide plate LED 502 from being diffused to the surroundings.

When the light from the condenser lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting region 506, the light is reflected toward the front side (the player's side) at the light emitting region 506. As a result, when viewed from the player, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light due to the reflected light, so that the area represented by the halftone dots in FIG. The shape will now be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, when viewed from the player (in the front-back direction), the image display device 5 is placed at the back, and the light guide plate device 500 is placed at the front. When viewed from the player, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal panel. Note that the image display device 5 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device.

(First production unit 300)
Next, the first effect unit 300 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-7 to 10-12. In FIGS. 10-7, (A) is a front view showing the first production unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first production unit viewed diagonally from the front. In Figure 10-9, (A) is a CC cross-sectional view of Figure 10-7 (A), (B) is a DD cross-sectional view of Figure 10-7 (A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view of Figure 10-7 It is a sectional view taken along line EE in (A). 10-10, (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. 10-11, (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B).

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, the first presentation unit 300 is arranged to cover the base member 301 and the front side of the base member 301, and is attached to the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N1. It is mainly composed of a cover member 302 that is attached to the base member 302 and an LED board 303 that is attached to the front surface of the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N2. It is provided so that it can be visually recognized through the glass window 50a and the board 200.

The base member 301 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are black. The front surface of the base member 301 includes a flat part 311 made of a flat surface, a recessed part 312 formed at the lower part of the flat part 311 and having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a rear wall part 313A located slightly behind the flat part 311. 313D.

On the upper part of the flat part 311, a plurality of trapezoidal convex parts 314A to 314E forming part of a decorative pattern 331 to be described later are formed in the longitudinal direction, and from between these convex parts 314A to 314E, the rear wall The parts 313A to 313D can be visually recognized. Note that the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are formed so as to be inclined upward and rearward (see FIG. 10-9(B)). Further, a predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surface of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the recess 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, has a depth capable of accommodating the LED board 303, and is surrounded by the flat portion 311 when viewed from the front. ing. When the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat part 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first performance LED 304 (to be described later) is located in front of the flat part 311. There is. Further, the recess 312 is formed with a plurality of vertically elongated heat radiation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED board 303 to the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, the front surface of the LED board 303 is equipped with a plurality of first performance LEDs 304 that can emit light forward and a plurality of other electronic components (not shown). At the same time, a plurality of printed wirings 320 are formed (see the enlarged view of FIG. 10-10(B)). On the other hand, on the back side of the LED board 303, a board-side connector CN for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 and electronic components (not shown) are mounted. Further, the surface of the LED board 303 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring 320 on the front and back surfaces) is black.

The cover member 302 is formed of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material in a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and includes a first translucent portion 321 corresponding to a part of the flat portion 311 and the recessed portion 312 of the base member 301; It mainly has second light-transmitting parts 322A and 322B corresponding to the first performance LED 304. Furthermore, a plurality of trapezoidal protrusions 324A to 324E are formed in the longitudinal direction at positions corresponding to the protrusions 314A to 314E of the base member 301.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the front surfaces of the second transparent parts 322A and 322B protrude forward from the front surface of the first transparent part 321, and a recessed part 322D is formed on the back surface. It is possible to accommodate the first performance LED 304. In addition, a light diffusing part 322C consisting of a fine uneven part is formed on the back surface of the second light-transmitting part 322A, 322B, and can diffuse the light from the first LED 304 for effect at the rear and emit it forward. ing. Note that the uneven portion may be formed by, for example, sandblasting or diamond cutting, and the forming method, shape, etc. can be changed in various ways.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the first light-transmitting portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decorative patterns 331 each having a hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, one decorative pattern 331 has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with a decorative portion 331A consisting of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction, and decorative portions 331B and 331C consisting of inclined lines extending diagonally to the left and diagonally to the right. It has a decorative part 331D and a decorative part 331E having a triangular shape when viewed from the front, and by sharing the decorative parts 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331, a plurality of decorative patterns 331 are continuously provided. .

In addition, each of these decorative parts 331A to 331E can be formed by, for example, performing sandblasting on the back (or front) of the cover member 302 to form fine irregularities, or pasting a translucent sticker or the like. As a result, each of the decorative parts 331A to 331E appears milky white or translucent when viewed from the player's side.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), an LED board 303 as an electronic component having a first presentation LED 304 is placed on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side is covered with a cover member 302. ing. However, since the cover member 302 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, it is not possible for the player to see the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 through the cover member 302. be.

Here, by placing the same black base member 301 around (around) the black LED board 303, the LED board 303 is assimilated with the surrounding base member 301, and the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 It is difficult to see the boundary between BD and BD. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 303 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 301, so that the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED board 303 placed in the recess 312 of the base member 301, the base member 301 and the LED board The cover member 302 is in a high position so as to cover the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, and the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 can be easily seen from the player side through the first light-transmitting part 321. As for the first performance LED 304, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it through the second light-transmitting portions 322A, 322B. In addition, by placing the milky white or translucent decorative parts 331A to 331E on the cover member 302 on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, the milky white or semitransparent decorative parts 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 are arranged on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, so that the milky white or semitransparent decorative parts 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 are arranged on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED board 303. The decorative pattern 331 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the cover member 302 is placed on the front side of the base member 301, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) is selected from among the plurality of decorative patterns 331. ) is formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. Specifically, the decorative parts 331B and 331C made of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect with the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is arranged between two members (LED By being provided across the board 303 and cover member 302), one decorative pattern 331 looks as if it is provided on one member, so that the LED board 303 and cover member 302 on the back side It becomes difficult to recognize that they are separate parts.

In addition, a portion of the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 becomes difficult to see from the player side due to the overlapping decorative parts 331B and 331C on the front side, so the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable. Note that since the decorative parts 331B and 331C are linear, even if they are arranged so as to overlap on the front side of the boundary part BD, the overlapping area with the boundary part BD is small, but the decorative pattern 331 overlaps the LED board 303 and the cover. By being formed over almost the entire front surface of the member 302, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members.

In addition, the decorative part 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged substantially parallel to the boundary part BD, so that it is difficult to distinguish because the aspect is similar to the boundary part BD. If the LED board 303 is milky white and has a brightness higher than black, it will be noticeable, and the LED board 303 will be less noticeable. Note that by arranging the decorative portions 331A so as to overlap along the boundary portion BD, a part of the boundary portion BD may be made difficult to be visually recognized from the player side by the decorative portions 331A.

In addition, these decorative parts 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape in the same way as the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED board 303, and are arranged substantially parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, so that the printed wiring Since the wiring pattern of the LED board 303 is similar (or common) to the wiring pattern of the LED board 320, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the LED board 303 and the LED board 303.

Furthermore, although the decorative parts 331D and 331E are different in appearance from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, they are thicker and larger in area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, so they are more noticeable than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD. In addition, a portion of the printed wiring 320 is overlapped with the front side of the printed wiring 320, making it difficult to visually recognize the printed wiring 320, so that the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable.

Furthermore, on the front surface of each of the rear wall sections 313A to 313D of the base member 301, a decorative pattern 341 consisting of vertically flat hexagonal linear protrusions is provided so as to be visible from the player side. The decorative pattern 341 is similar (or common) in aspect to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, so that the aspect is similar to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 even in an area of the base member 301 that is not covered with the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 can be formed, the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, the base member 301 has rear wall portions 313A to 313D as predetermined areas that can be viewed from the player side without seeing through the cover member 302. By providing the decorative pattern 341 as a predetermined decorative pattern that is the same or similar in aspect to the decorative pattern 331, it becomes difficult to tell that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members. 303 becomes less noticeable.

Further, since the LED board 303 is disposed in the recess 312 formed at the lower part of the base member 301, the LED board 303 is located below the upper region of the recess 312 in the base member 301, that is, at a position spaced apart from the image display device 5. This makes it less noticeable since it is located away from the image display device 5, which is the focus of the player's attention.

In this way, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 is connected to the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. By straddling the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, it becomes less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 303 that you would not normally want to show to the player from the perspective of appearance and design, can be placed on the front side where they can be seen by the player, increasing the degree of design freedom. can be increased.

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly explained based on FIGS. 10-13. 10-13, (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a FF sectional view of (A).

As shown in FIG. 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 attached to the board 200 from the front side, and a cover member 702 provided on the front side of the base member 701. The device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are configured as an integrated unit.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided at the upper right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided at the lower left, and a base plate 701A of the base member 701 and a cover plate 702A of the cover member 702 are provided. In between, there is a game ball path 705A that allows a game ball (game ball P) to enter the big winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7, and a game ball (game ball P) that can enter the second start winning hole of the variable winning ball device 6B. A game ball path 705B is provided through which players P) can enter. Further, below the special variable winning ball device 7, an LED board 703 is provided with a plurality of performance LEDs 704 that can emit light forward.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a synthetic resin material having translucency. Therefore, the game balls passing through the game ball paths 705A, 705B can be visually recognized from the player side through the cover plate 702A.

(First production unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-14 to 10-16. 10-14, (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first production unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 10-15 is a diagram for comparing the first production unit and the variable winning ball unit. FIGS. 10-16 are diagrams for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side below the image display device 5, and when viewed from the player's side, The right end of the one performance unit 300 is provided so as to overlap or be close to the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-13(B), the front part of the variable winning ball unit 700 is placed on the front side of the board 200, while the first production unit 300 is located on the front side of the board 200. It is located on the back side of.

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(A) and (B), the front-rear dimension L1A, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first transparent part 321 of the first presentation unit 300, is the second transparent part 322A, 322B. It is longer than the front-to-back dimension L1B, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 (L1A>L1B).

In the first light transmitting portion 321 of the cover member 302, among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the first light transmitting portion 321, the transmittance of light transmitted in the T direction is XA %. In addition, in the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B, light that is transmitted in the T direction is transmitted. The light transmittance is XB%. In other words, not all (100%) of the light that enters the first transparent section 321 and the second transparent sections 322A, 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and some light may be reflected at the front surface. , is emitted at the rear in a direction different from the T direction (so that it spreads out to the surroundings). In particular, the second light transmitting parts 322A and 322B have a light diffusing part 322C made of uneven parts formed on the back surface, so that light can more easily transmit in a direction different from the T direction than the first light transmitting part 321. , the transmittance of light in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first light transmitting portion 321 (low transmittance; XA%>XB%).

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(C) and (D), in the cover plate 702A, among the light that enters from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (T direction), the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is Y %. Here, the front-to-back dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-to-back dimensions L1A, L1B of the first light-transmitting part 321 and the second light-transmitting parts 322A, 322B of the cover member 302 (L2<L1A, L2<L1B), the light incident from the front is guided in the T direction inside and difficult to be diffused to the surroundings before being emitted from the back, and there is no light diffusing part like the second light transmitting part 322A, 322B. Since it is a flat plate, the light transmittance of the cover plate 702A in the T direction is higher than the light transmittance of the cover member 302 in the T direction (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%).

In other words, since the light transmittance of the cover member 302 is lower than that of the cover plate 702A, a predetermined portion (for example, It is better to visually recognize a predetermined portion on the back side of the cover member 302 (for example, the first production LED 304 or the LED board 303) from the player side through the cover member 302 than to visually recognize the ball P). Since the visibility is low, the LED board 303 including the first presentation LED 304, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 10-15, the first effect unit 300 has the same color (black) as the LED board 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301 arranged around it. , the LED board 303 is less noticeable. Further, the front and rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302 of the first production unit 300 are longer than the front and rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B>L2), and the first production unit The light transmittance (XA%, XA%) of the cover member 302 of 300 in the T direction is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 in the T direction. (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%), the LED board 303 is less noticeable.

Therefore, when the first production unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 provided at a different position (on the right side) from the first production unit 300 are viewed from the player side, the player can see through the cover member 702. Since the visibility when viewing the LED board 303 through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility when viewing the game ball P, the variable winning ball unit 700 located near the first production unit 300 Compared to this, the LED board 303 placed on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a light-transmitting member, appears to be more difficult to see. Further, since the cover member 302 is placed closer to the back side than the cover plate 702A, and the base member 301 and the LED board 303 are dark black, the LED board 303 becomes more inconspicuous.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the present embodiment, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member disposed around it, are of the same color (black), but the present invention The electronic component and the specific member do not have to be of the same color; for example, they may be of the same color or similar color.

Colors have three attributes: hue (color), lightness (brightness), and saturation (vividness). A combination of colors that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness and saturation) and are adjacent in terms of hue (adjacent colors); 2. A combination of different tones but the same hue; 3. Includes combinations of colors that differ only in brightness or saturation.

Here, an example of the above "1. Combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue" is shown in Figure 10-16. To explain based on this, when the three primary colors of colorants, cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees on a hue wheel of a predetermined number (here, 24 colors), Each of the three colors is a non-similar color to each other. Colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel are "similar colors," and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors on the hue wheel.

For example, if cyan (C) is used as the reference color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to cyan (C), When magenta (M) is used as the standard color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to magenta (M), and yellow ( When Y) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to a range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to yellow (Y). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel may be regarded as "similar colors."

Similar colors are combinations of warm colors such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that make you feel warm, and cool colors, which are chromatic colors that make you feel cold, such as blue and purple, as well as colors such as green and purple. It is preferable to include a combination of colors included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors located between warm colors and cool colors.

(Second production unit 400)
Next, the second effect unit 400 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-17 to 10-19. 10-17, (A) is a front view showing the second presentation unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second presentation unit with the cover member removed. In FIGS. 10-18, (A) is a GG sectional view of FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a HH sectional view of FIG. 10-17(A). 10-19, (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the second presentation unit 400 includes a base member 401, a cover member 402 disposed to cover the front side of the base member 401, and a front surface of the base member 401. It mainly consists of an LED board 403 attached to the LED board 403 and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403.As shown in FIG. It is provided so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player's side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 401 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a substantially half-moon shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and circumferential surface) are white.

The LED board 403 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss protruding from the front surface of the base member 401. A plurality of second performance LEDs 404A, 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 403. Further, on the back side of the LED board 403, there are a plurality of second performance LEDs 404C that can emit light upward, a plurality of second performance LEDs 404D that can emit light downward, and other electronic components (not shown). ) are installed. The second presentation LEDs 404A to 404D are angle-type LEDs that can emit light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 403. Further, the surface of the LED board 403 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED board 403, and includes a plurality of second performance LEDs 404A arranged along the upper side of the front surface of the LED board 403; It is arranged between a plurality of second performance LEDs 404B arranged along the lower side of the front surface of the LED board 403, and the light from the second performance LEDs 404A is incident on the front end surface, and the light from the second performance LEDs 404B is The light is made incident on the rear end surface.

As shown in FIG. 10-18(A), on the back side of the inner lens 405, the light incident from the second performance LEDs 404A and 404B is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 406. The light is emitted substantially uniformly forward from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405. Since the front surface of the inner lens 405 is a flat surface, it emits light from the surface like a light guide plate.

The reflecting portion 406 is formed into an uneven state (rough surface) in which a cross-sectional view in the traveling direction of the light guided inside the inner lens 405 has a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. Specifically, the inner lens 405 is constructed using a molding method in which uneven parts are created on the back surface of the inner lens 405 using a stamper or injection. The reflective portion may be constructed by an adhesive dot method in which a dot-shaped adhesive material is attached to the plate, a groove processing method, or the like.

The cover member 402 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed to be able to cover the front sides of the base member 401 and the LED board 403. At a position corresponding to the LED board 403 on the front surface of the cover member 402, a convex portion 410 having a shape that is a slightly enlarged version of the LED board 403 when viewed from the front is provided to protrude forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, a decorative portion 420 consisting of the letter “V” (logotype) is printed with a colored paint having a translucent property, or a translucent sheet on which letters are printed is pasted. Due to this, etc., it is provided to be able to transmit light. Furthermore, a light diffusing section 402A consisting of a concave and convex section is formed on the back surface of the convex section 410, so that the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In an area above the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex stripes 421A protruding toward the back side are provided to extend in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second performance LEDs 404C. Further, in the lower region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex stripes 421B protruding toward the back side are provided to extend in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the respective second performance LEDs 404D. Note that a light diffusing portion made of an uneven portion may also be formed in a portion of the back surface of the cover member 402 where the protruding stripes 421A and 421B are not formed. Further, the cover member 402 is formed so as to be inclined rearward upwardly and downwardly from the convex portion 410.

The plurality of protrusions 421A, 421B have uneven parts continuously formed on the rear end surface, and a stepped part 421C is formed at a midway position in the longitudinal direction, and extends upward and downward from the protrusion 410. By extending so as to be inclined to the rear side, the light emitted upward and downward from the second presentation LEDs 404C and 404D can enter from these uneven parts and the stepped part 421C, and also The emitted light is diffused by the uneven portion and emitted forward.

In this way, in the second effect unit 400, when the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B emit light, the light emitted from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is emitted forward by the inner lens 405, and the light is emitted from the convex portion of the cover member 402. By being incident on the region corresponding to the portion 410, the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), an LED board 403 as an electronic component having second presentation LEDs 404A to 404D is arranged on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side is covered with a cover member 402. Covered. However, since the cover member 402 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, it is assumed from the player's side that a light diffusing portion is formed in the cover member 402 at a portion other than the protruding stripes 421A and 421B. However, it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 401 and the LED board 403 through the parts other than the protrusions 421A and 421B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19(B), by disposing the same white base member 401 around (periphery) the white LED board 403, the LED board 403 is connected to the surrounding base member 401. As a result, the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the cover member 402 becomes difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 403 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 forms the boundary between the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when viewed from the player side. It is provided at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and lower side of the portion BD. In other words, a part of the decorative part 420 is arranged so as to overlap (overlap) a part of the boundary part BD on the front side of the boundary part BD, so that a part of the boundary part BD is covered by the decorative part 420. By becoming less visible, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 403 that you would not normally want to show to the player from the perspective of appearance and design, can be placed on the front side where the player can see them, which increases the degree of design freedom. can be increased.

Further, the decoration part 420 is provided so that the area covering (overlapping) the front side of the boundary part BD is larger than that of the decoration pattern 331 described above, and by making the boundary part BD difficult to see, the LED board 403 It makes it less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decoration part 420 partially hangs (overlaps) at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and a part of the lower side of the boundary part BD when viewed from the player side. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portions 420 may be arranged at positions corresponding to all portions of the boundary portion BD. In addition, it is preferable to provide so that it may overlap about 1/3 or more of the boundary part BD.

Furthermore, since the letter “V” is displayed as a logotype on the decorative portion 420, it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and become aware of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Therefore, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, a form in which the letter "V" indicating a jackpot is applied as a logo type is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. ”, characters indicating a variable display result, characters indicating a jackpot such as “heat”, “fierce heat”, and “!!”, characters such as the model name of a game machine, a title, the name of a character appearing, etc. may also be used. Furthermore, in addition to characters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, patterns, etc. may be displayed as the decoration portion.

In addition, the LED board 403 has a second effect LED 404A as a light emitting means that can cause the decoration part 420 to emit light, so that the decoration part 420 stands out due to the light emission, so that the player can see the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Since it becomes difficult to be aware of the boundary portion BD with the LED board 403, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, the second performance LED 404A is provided so that the decorative portion 420 can emit surface light through the inner lens 405, so that the player can see the LED board 403 because the decorative portion 420 stands out due to the surface emitted light. Since it becomes difficult to notice the boundary portion BD between the base member 401 and the LED board 403, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative portion 420 is a single decorative portion consisting of the letter “V”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402 In the case where a plurality of decorative parts 420 are provided in a region of the cover member 402 and a plurality of predetermined decorative parts (for example, a pattern, etc.) different in form from the decorative part 420 are provided in a region other than the convex part 410 of the cover member 402, the plurality of decorative parts It is preferable that the number of decorative parts is larger than the plurality of predetermined decorative parts. By doing so, the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 is made difficult to see due to the plurality of decorative portions, and is more conspicuous than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions provided in other areas. Therefore, the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In this case, it is sufficient that the plurality of decorative parts and the plurality of predetermined decorative parts are different in form; for example, the predetermined decorative part may be an enlarged form or a reduced form of the decorative part, or the external shape, shape, Any one of the colors, sizes, etc. may be different.

The cover member 402 also includes a convex portion 410 that is a boundary corresponding region corresponding to the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and a convex portion 410 that does not correspond to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. The light transmittance of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the light transmittance of the region other than the convex portion 410. By doing so, the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 becomes difficult to see through the convex part 410 from the player, so that the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

(Third production unit 600 and fourth production unit 800)
Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-20 to 10-26. 10-20, (A) is a front view showing the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit. 10-21, (A) is a sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-22 is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility status of the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit. FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configuration of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. FIG. 10-25 is a diagram showing a presentation mode when the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit emit light. FIGS. 10-26 are schematic front views showing (A) a state in which the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which the third effect unit is located at the effect position.

(Third production unit 600)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21(A), and 10-26, the third presentation unit 600 includes a base member 601 and a cover member disposed to cover the front side of the base member 601. 602, an LED board 603 attached to the front surface of the base member 601, and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front side of the LED board 603. ) and the performance motor 631 (see FIG. 10-2), which is a drive source that allows movement in the vertical direction between the origin position shown in FIG. 10-26(B) and the performance position shown in FIG. It has a power transmission member 632 for transmitting power to the light emitting production section 630, and as shown in FIG. 10-20, in the upper part of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, In other words, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the player's side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is made of a non-transparent synthetic resin material and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are white.

The LED board 603 has a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a vertical wall that projects from the front periphery of the base member 601 . On the front surface of the LED board 603, a plurality of third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. The third performance LEDs 604A and 604B are capable of emitting light forward. Further, the surface of the LED board 603 (insulating portion excluding printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white. Note that the cable C connecting the LED board 603 and the production control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see FIG. 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, and is formed to have almost the same shape as the LED board 603, and allows the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the front surface of the LED board 603 to be viewed from the front side. It is arranged to cover.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), the front and back surfaces of the inner lens 605 are provided with lights for diffusing and emitting the light from the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back side toward the front. The provision of a light diffusing section 605A consisting of a concavo-convex portion allows surface light to be emitted.

The cover member 602 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed to be able to cover the front sides of the base member 601 and the LED board 603.

On the front surface of the cover member 602, a decorative portion 620 consisting of the letters "XXX" (logotype) is printed with a colored paint that is translucent, or a translucent sheet on which letters are printed is pasted. Due to this, etc., it is provided to be able to transmit light. Further, a light diffusing section 602A consisting of a concave and convex portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 602, so that the light from the inner lens 605 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the characters "XXX" indicating a jackpot are applied as a logo type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and It may be characters such as the name of a character, characters indicating a variable display result such as "Jackpot", "BONUS", or "RUSH", or characters suggesting a jackpot such as "Heat", "Very Hot", or "!!". Furthermore, in addition to characters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, patterns, etc. may be displayed as the decoration portion.

In this way, in the third effect unit 600, when the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B emit light, the light emitted from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B to the front through the inner lens 605 is further transmitted to the cover member 602. The entire front surface of the cover member 602 including the decorative portion 620 emits light by being diffused and emitted forward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A are arranged along the periphery of the letters "XXX" forming the decoration part 620, and the plurality of third effect LEDs 604B are It is arranged at a position that does not correspond to section 620. By arranging the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A along the periphery of the letters "XXX" that constitute the decoration part 620, when the third effect LEDs 604A emit light, the letters "XXX" are displayed. Since the periphery of the characters is illuminated, the shape of the decorative portion 620 can be easily recognized.

In addition, the power transmission member 632, which constitutes a part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light emission production section 630, is rotatably supported on a rotation axis with one end facing in the front-rear direction, and the other end emits light. The power transmission member of the arm member provided with the production section 630 can be changed in various ways, and may be a rack gear, a pinion gear, etc. as long as it can transmit power so that the light emission production section 630 can be moved in the vertical direction. There may be.

(4th production unit 800)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21(B), the fourth presentation unit 800 includes a base member 801, a cover member 802 disposed to cover the front side of the base member 801, and a base member 802. It mainly consists of an LED board 803 attached to the front side of the LED board 801 and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front side of the LED board 803, and as shown in FIG. At the upper left part, it is provided so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the board 200 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 801 is formed of a non-transparent synthetic resin material into a box shape with an open front, and a portion of the periphery is formed into an arc shape along the guide rail 211 . Furthermore, the surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces) are white.

The LED board 803 is formed to be smaller in front view than the base member 801, and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801. On the front surface of the LED board 803, a plurality of fourth performance LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. The fourth presentation LEDs 804 are angle-type LEDs that can emit light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 803, and are arranged in plural along the peripheral edge of the front surface of the LED board 803. Further, the surface of the LED board 803 (insulating portion excluding printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is placed in an area surrounded by the plurality of fourth performance LEDs 804 on the front surface of the LED board 803.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(B), on the back side of the inner lens 805, the light incident from the fourth performance LED 804 is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 806 for reflecting the light forward. The light is emitted forward almost equally from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805. Since the front surface of the inner lens 805 is a flat surface, it emits light from a surface like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is made of a light-transmitting (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed to be able to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED board 803. Specifically, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A along the guide rail 211 among the standing walls erected on the front periphery of the base member 801, and covers the front end of the standing wall 801B other than the part along the guide rail 211. Covers the front end. Further, a light diffusing section 802A consisting of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 802, so that the light from the inner lens 805 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this way, in the fourth production unit 800, when the fourth production LED 804 emits light, the light emitted from the fourth production LED 804 forward through the inner lens 805 further passes through the cover member 802. By being diffused and emitted forward, the entire front surface of the cover member 802 emits surface light.

Next, the third presentation unit 600 and the fourth presentation unit 800 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 10-24, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 have the surfaces of their respective base members 601, 801 and LED boards 603, 803 of the same color, which is white, and these base members 601, 801 and the front sides of the LED boards 603, 803 are covered with translucent cover members 602, 802, and the front side emits light when the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and the fourth performance LED 804 are lit. has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (A), an LED board 603 as an electronic component having third presentation LEDs 604A and 604B is arranged on the front side of the base member 601, and the front side is covered with a cover. Covered by member 602. However, since the cover member 602 is made of a synthetic resin material having light-transmitting properties, even if the cover member 602 is formed with the light diffusing section 602A, the cover member 602 cannot be seen from the player's side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the back side, an inner lens 605 with a light diffusing section 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the back side so as to cover the LED board 603 from the front side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the LED board 603, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize the front surface of the LED board 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(A), a standing wall of the same white base member 601 is arranged around (around) the white LED board 603, so that the LED board 603 is connected to the surrounding base member. 601, the boundary BD between the LED board 603 and the cover member 602 is difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 603 is provided on the base member 601, so that the LED board 603, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), an LED board 803 as an electronic component having a fourth presentation LED 804 is arranged on the front side of the base member 801, and is covered with a cover member 802. However, since the cover member 802 is made of a synthetic resin material having light-transmitting properties, even if the cover member 802 is formed with the light diffusing section 802A, the cover member 802 cannot be seen from the player's side. It is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 801 and the LED board 803.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(B), by disposing the same white base member 801 around (periphery) the white LED board 803, the LED board 803 is connected to the surrounding base member 801. As a result, the boundary BD between the LED board 803 and the cover member 802 becomes difficult to see. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 803 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 801, so that the LED board 803, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

However, the fourth performance LED 804 is an angle-type LED that enters light from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the periphery of the LED board 803, so that the LED including the fourth performance LED 804 The front side of the front peripheral edge of the substrate 803 is not covered by the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area in which a reflecting portion and a light diffusing portion are formed than the inner lens 605, so that the player The visibility when viewing the LED board 803 including the fourth performance LED 804 through the inner lens 805 from the player side is the same as the visibility of the LED board 803 including the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 from the player side. The visibility is higher than that of 603. In other words, the LED board 803 is more noticeable than the LED board 603.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the light emitting effect part 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side (see FIG. 10-20). ), furthermore, the arrangement position in the front-rear direction of the front surface is further forward (on the player side) than the arrangement position of the front surface of the fourth production unit 800 (see FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23), and The light emitting mode by the fourth effect LED 804 of the effect unit 800 is surface emission, whereas the light emission mode by the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the third effect unit 600 is point light (see FIG. 10-25). In addition, in FIG. 10-25, the backgrounds of the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are shown in black for the convenience of explaining the light emission mode.

In this way, the light emitting production unit 630 of the third production unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 when viewed from the player side, is located closer to the player, and emits strong light. Therefore, the performance means has higher visibility than the fourth performance unit 800 when viewed from the player side. That is, the third production unit 600, which is a production means with higher visibility when viewed from the player side than the fourth production unit 800, is provided in the vicinity of the fourth production unit 800. Since the third presentation unit 600 is more conspicuous than the fourth presentation unit 800 and attracts more attention from players, the LED board 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth presentation unit 800, becomes less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light emitting effect part 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side, and is located closer to the player. , the form is illustrated in which it is configured as a presentation means with higher visibility than the LED board 803 and the base member 801 by emitting strong light, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third presentation The light emitting production section 630 of the unit 600 has improved visibility by being different from the LED board 803 of the fourth production unit 800 in at least one of the size, position relative to the player, and light emission mode when viewed from the player side. It is good if the value is high.

Furthermore, the front surface of the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 as a production means may be colored with a color that is more visible than the surface color of the LED board 803, or a decorative section with a color that is highly visible may be provided. The cover member 602 may be molded in a highly visible color to easily increase the visibility of the light emitting production section 630. Furthermore, the visibility of the light emitting effect part 630 may be easily enhanced by the light emitting mode (for example, lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B.

In addition, although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the light emitting production section 630 of the third production unit 600 which can emit light by a light emitting means and can be operated by a production motor 631 is applied as a production means, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be a light-emitting means (such as a lamp part) provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or a effect means that does not emit light by a light-emitting means, or a light-emitting means provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3. It may be a production section that does not operate and is fixed at a predetermined position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23, a protruding portion 3A (eaves portion) is formed at the upper front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, which protrudes further forward than the gaming board 2 and the glass window 50a. The protruding part 3A is formed above the gaming area Y so as not to obstruct the visibility of the game ball passing through the upper part of the gaming area Y, but by protruding largely forward, it can be used for pachinko, for example. When the game machine 75SG001 is installed on the game island of the game hall, the area E1 below the protrusion 3A (the area indicated by halftone dots in the figure) is shaded by the outside light of the game hall being blocked by the protrusion 3A. It gets dark.

Therefore, by providing the third presentation unit 600 and the fourth presentation unit 800 at a position corresponding to the area E1 in the upper part of the game area Y, the LED boards 603 and 803 are easily lost in the shadow of the protrusion 3A. So it becomes less noticeable.

Further, above the LED boards 603, 803, there is provided a protrusion 3A that protrudes toward the player side than the LED boards 603, 803, and the protrusion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603, 803 ( (See FIG. 10-23), the LED boards 603, 803 are in the shadow of the protrusion 3A and become less noticeable.

Further, although the LED boards 603, 803 and the base members 601, 801 are white in color, the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be dark colored (for example, black). By doing so, the LED boards 603, 803 and the base members 601, 801 can easily disappear into the shadow of the protrusion 3A, making them less noticeable.

Note that in this embodiment, a protrusion 3A that protrudes toward the player above the LED boards 603, 803 is applied as the protrusion that protrudes toward the player above the electronic components and specific members. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protrusion is not limited to a protrusion provided protrudingly from a part of the frame 3 for the game machine. It may be configured by other gaming devices (for example, winning ball device, etc.) or presentation devices provided in the area Y. In addition, the protruding part 3A is not only fixedly installed on the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, but also moves from the origin position to the protruding position at a predetermined timing, so that the protruding part 3A can be positioned above the electronic components and specific members. It may be a protrusion that protrudes to the side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 is a light emitting area 506 when the light emitting part 630 and the power transmission member 632 of the third effect unit 600 operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501 move. It is formed so as to overlap in front and behind most of the moving region E2 (the region surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 10-26).

More specifically, the movement area E2 of the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 is an area where the light emitting effect part 630 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and is an area including the origin position and the effect position. When light enters the light guide plate 501 from the right end surface 501a, the light emitting region 506 becomes in a state of emitting light, and the display image of the rear image display device 5, the light emitting production section 630, and the power transmission member 632 are visible from the player's side to the light guide plate. 501 and becomes difficult or impossible to see. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the light guide plate LED 502 to control the light emitting area during a movement period in which the light emission performance section 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the performance position or during a performance period in which they are located at the performance position. 506, the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 become difficult or impossible to see through the light guide plate 501 from the player's side. It is possible to prevent the cable C (electronic component) etc. provided along the member 632 from becoming conspicuous.

In addition, after the light emitting production section 630 moves to the production position, when the light guide plate LED 502 goes out and the light emission production of the light emitting area 506 is completed, the power transmission member 632, cable C, etc. become visible, but the light emitting production section By lighting up the third presentation LEDs 604A and 604B of 630 to make the light emission presentation section 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and the cable C can be made less noticeable.

Additionally, the electronic components (for example, the LED board 603 and cable C) that are operable in this way are visible to the player during the waiting period and movement period when they are waiting at the origin position. However, it is preferable to make it difficult or impossible to see from the player's side at least during the performance period when the player is located at the performance position. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the electronic components from becoming conspicuous during the production period that attracts the attention of the players.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the feature section 75SG of this embodiment has the following features:
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having the following.
In this way, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be seen by the player, the electronic parts become less noticeable due to the specific members having similar colors, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
Note that the electronic component and the specific member can be changed to any color as long as they are similar in color. Further, as in the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member may be the same color (for example, black on black, white on white, etc.).

(Explanation regarding transformation and application of characteristic part 75SG)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

For example, in the feature section 75SG of the embodiment, light emitting diodes such as the first performance LED 304, second performance LEDs 404A to 404D, third performance LEDs 604A and 604B, and fourth performance LED 804 are provided as electronic components. Although the embodiment in which the LED boards 303, 403, 603, and 803 are applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. (including the control board 12, relay board, etc.), electronic parts such as sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, cables (wiring), and boards and members for fixing these.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, a form is illustrated in which a base member 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging an LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component is applied as a specific member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a member provided around the electronic component, even if it is not a part of a unit (device) that arranges or houses the electronic component as described above. If there is, a different member provided separately from the unit (device) in which the electronic component is arranged or housed (for example, a member forming part of another unit, a part of the game board 2 or the frame 3 for the game machine) (a member constituting a part, etc.).

Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which cover members 302, 402, 602, and 802 forming part of a unit (device) in which electronic components are arranged or housed are applied as the light-transmitting member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the member does not constitute a part of a unit (device) for arranging or accommodating electronic components as described above, it may be a member having translucency. If a member is provided so that a player can see through the electronic component and the specific member, it may be a different member provided separately from the unit (device) that arranges or houses the electronic component (for example, It may be a member that constitutes a part of another unit, a member that constitutes a part of the game board 2 or the frame 3 for a game machine, etc.).

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, an example is given in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color (same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color as described above, the electronic component and the specific member are not limited to the same color.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members partially overlap on the back side of the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components, and , the non-overlapping portions are arranged around the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803, but the present invention is not limited to this, and electronic components and specific members are arranged from the player's side. When viewed visually, they may be arranged side by side on at least one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side without overlapping. Additionally, if the specific component is visible and placed around the electronic component when viewed from the player's side, the electronic component and the specific component are placed apart in the vertical, horizontal, front-back, etc. directions. may have been done.

Note that the specific member provided around the electronic component includes a specific member provided at a position that is visible from the player's side together with the electronic component, for example, a specific member located within a range of about 5 cm from the electronic component. It may also include specific members.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 made of a synthetic resin material having translucency are applied as the translucent members, but the present invention applies thereto. The material is not limited to any particular material as long as it is a translucent member, and may be a glass material or the like. Further, as long as the electronic component and the specific member can be seen through the member by the player, the member may be transparent or translucent, or may be colored in a predetermined color. Furthermore, the light transmittance does not have to be 100% or a value close to 100%.

In addition, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as light-transmitting members allow the player to pass through the cover members 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components. Although a form in which a part or the entire area of the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific member is visible is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the electronic component is If the electronic component and the specific component are provided so that they can be seen through the electronic component, the electronic component and the specific component can be visually recognized together even if at least a part of the specific component is not visible through the component. All you have to do is stay there.

Moreover, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as light-transmitting members, the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components and the base member 301 as a specific member, 401, 601, 801 are arranged along the electronic components and the specific member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not necessarily arranged along the electronic components and the specific member. It doesn't have to be done. That is, the electronic component or the specific member may be arranged obliquely with respect to the light-transmitting member.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, the entire surface of the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 or the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 is colored in a predetermined color (black or white). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the colors of parts of the electronic component and the specific member that are visible through the transparent member (for example, the front color of the electronic component and the specific member) are similar colors. If it is, the entire surface does not necessarily have to be of similar color. Furthermore, the colors of these electronic components and specific components may be colored during the molding of the components, by painting or printing after molding, or by pasting stickers, etc. You can leave it there.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the embodiment, an example is given in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color (same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined electronic device that is difficult or invisible to the player and is installed separately from the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component or the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific component. parts (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and predetermined members (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic components. (a member for fixing the starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.), the predetermined electronic components (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) , it is preferable that the color is not similar to that of a predetermined member (for example, a member that fixes the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.).

In this way, with respect to predetermined electronic components such as the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, and solenoids 81 and 82 that are difficult or invisible to the player, the balance with the predetermined member that fixes them is determined. Since general-purpose products can be used without considering the above, manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, by setting the color of the specific component to a color that has the same hue as the electronic component and has either higher brightness or saturation, the visibility of the specific component will be higher than that of the electronic component. Electronic components can be made relatively less noticeable.

Furthermore, by coloring the light-transmitting member in a similar color to the electronic component and the specific member, the light-transmitting member blends in with the electronic component and the specific member, thereby making the electronic component less noticeable.

Further, for example, in a case where electronic components such as a black LED board are arranged on the right side of the game board 2, an electronic component such as a black LED board may be installed on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side with the image display device 5 in between. By providing an outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or similar color as the electronic component separately from the specific component so as to be visible to the player, the black component can be arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5 in a well-balanced manner. This makes it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable, and the electronic components can be made less noticeable. In this way, by symmetrically arranging a member of the same color or similar color as the electronic component at a separate position from the specific member, the electronic component can be made less noticeable.

Further, the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 75SG may be combined with some or all of the configurations regarding the characteristic portions 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK, etc., as appropriate. For example, when the effects described in the characteristic parts 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK can be executed on the image display device 5, the first effect unit 300 described in the characteristic part 75SG provided around the image display device 5 , the electronic components of the second presentation unit 400, the third presentation unit 600, and the fourth presentation unit 800 become less noticeable, so that the above-mentioned presentation can be presented suitably.

Specifically, for example, as explained in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even during periods other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4. In this case, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect using the first light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs, and the light emitting effect is executed when executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2 etc. In the case of controlling the electronic parts (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) and specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) (for example, the game effect lamp 9 It may also be possible to control the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member provided at a position closer than the game effect lamp 9 (or to make the light amount lower than that of the game effect lamp 9, etc.). By doing this, when the light emitting effect using the first light emitting member is restricted, the light emitting effect using the second light emitting member is executed, thereby preventing electronic components and specific components from becoming more noticeable. can.

Also, among the second light-emitting members provided around the electronic components and the specific member, the second effect is capable of surface-emitting the decorative portion 420 of the transparent member disposed on the front side of the electronic component and the specific member. For light-emitting members such as the LED 404A that are not noticeable even if they continue to emit light, the light amount may be maintained (not restricted in execution) even when controlling not to perform a light-emitting effect using the first light-emitting member. . By doing so, it is possible to make the electronic components and specific members less noticeable without reducing the presentation effect too much.

Further, in the embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1,75SG001 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of game balls is Rental balls that are circulated inside the gaming machine and are lent out in response to a player's lending request and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is counted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the numbers are subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001), and which has an electronic component that is visible to the player. (for example, LED board 303, 403, 603, 803), and a specific member (for example, base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in the same color as the electronic component. , a translucent member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can see the electronic component and the specific member through the member; , a predetermined electronic component that is difficult or invisible to the player (for example, the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.), and a predetermined electronic component provided around the predetermined electronic component. A predetermined member (for example, a member that fixes the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and a pseudo movable object display from the first display position to the first display position. A display means capable of moving and displaying to a different second display position, a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position, and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect, The light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) formed across the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301). (see FIG. 10-12), the predetermined member has a color that is not similar to the predetermined electronic component, and the effect execution means moves the pseudo movable object display from the first display position to the second display position. A pseudo movable object display effect that moves and displays the movable object from the first position to the second position can be executed, and the effect execution means displays the movable object effect for a predetermined period of time. and the pseudo movable body display effect are executed, than when the pseudo movable body display effect is executed by the effect execution means without executing the movable body effect during the predetermined period. One example is a gaming machine that is highly controlled by the state.

According to such a configuration, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, so it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design. Further, as for the predetermined electronic parts that are difficult or invisible to the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are being executed.

In other words, it is possible to create a game machine that has a good appearance while increasing the degree of freedom in design, and the player is able to enter the presentation with the expectation that the movable object presentation will be executed when the pseudo movable object display effect is executed. Since it attracts attention, the interest of the performance can be improved. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that looks good when installed in a gaming parlor and easily attracts players' interest.

Furthermore, it is advantageous for players as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can increase the degree of freedom in design and can draw the player's attention to the fact that a movable object display effect and a pseudo movable object display effect are executed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state, the display means being capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position; A movable body that can move to a second position different from the first position, and a performance execution means that can perform a performance, and the performance execution means moves the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second position. A pseudo movable object display effect in which the movable object is moved to a display position and a movable object effect in which the movable object is moved from the first position to the second position can be executed, and the effect executing means allows the movable object to be displayed in a predetermined period. When the physical representation and the pseudo movable body display performance are executed, the performance execution means executes the pseudo movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period. Examples include gaming machines that have a high rate of being controlled to the advantageous state. Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

(Characteristic part 241SG form)
The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display on the image display device 5) (a part that can be displayed by moving Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position);
A movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that is movable from an origin position to a production position);
Equipped with
The direction in which the pseudo movable body display moves and displays from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are the same direction ( For example, the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position are the same downward direction),
The movement of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, the first pseudo The movement amount L2 of the movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2 (see FIG. 17-37),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying the pseudo movable body, it is possible to perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the movable body, thereby surprising the player.

The gaming machine of form A2 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
Equipped with a display means capable of displaying a pseudo movable body display (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5),
The pseudo movable body display causes a reaction movement of a predetermined amount of movement when it moves from a first position (for example, a first origin position) to a second position (for example, a first presentation position) different from the first position. It is a display imitating a movable body (for example, the first non-mounted movable body M100) to be carried out,
The display means can move and display the pseudo movable body display from a first display position corresponding to the first position to a second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 On the display device 5, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. some part),
The pseudo movable body display displays a reaction movement of a specific amount of movement when moved from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100). (a part that displays a reaction action (bounce display) of a predetermined movement amount when moving and displaying from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stopping and displaying at the first effect display position),
The specific movement amount is larger than the predetermined movement amount (for example, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). The movement amount L12 of the reaction action display is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first presentation position. (see Figure 17-38),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying a pseudo movable object, it is possible to simulate the same effect as a movable object without installing a movable object, and also to reduce the reaction that occurs when the movable object moves to the second position. By displaying the motion in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form A3 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display on the image display device 5) (a part that can be displayed by moving Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position);
A movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that is movable from the origin position to the production position);
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
A pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the second display position). (portion that can be moved and displayed in one direction display position),
a movable body performance that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can move the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position);
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. The rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display performance is executed (for example, during the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development using the mounted movable body 32 When the performance A and the developed performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the control is made into a jackpot game state than when the developed performance A is not executed and the developed performance B is executed. (expectation of jackpot) is high (see Figure 17-11),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are being executed.

The A4 format gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays a second pseudo movable body display on the image display device 5). (a part that can be displayed by moving the Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position);
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
A special suggestion performance that suggests that the pseudo movable body display will be controlled to the advantageous state by displaying the pseudo movable object display (for example, a preview performance A that foretells the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot);
A notification performance that notifies players of content that is advantageous to the player (for example, development performance B that notifies that the game will develop into a strong super reach performance);
A predetermined effect (for example, development effect B) that is executed before the notification effect and indicates that the notification effect is to be executed by displaying a notification-related image (for example, character image Z310) related to the notification effect. development suggestion that suggests the possibility of implementation), and
is executable,
In the predetermined effect, the pseudo movable body display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) in which the degree of expectation for the notification effect to be executed differs;
The display means is
In the special suggestion effect, the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden ( (See Figures 17-25 (C) to (F)),
In the predetermined effect, after displaying the pseudo-movable body display at the second display position, it is hidden without moving from the second display position to the first display position (Fig. 17-26 (A ) to (J), see Figure 17-27(A)),
Before executing the notification effect and when hiding the pseudo movable body display displayed at the second display position, the notification related image (for example, Character image Z310) can be displayed (see FIGS. 17-26(F) to (J), FIG. 17-27(A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special suggestion performance, the pseudo-movable object display moves in the same way as the movable object as a structure, so attention is paid to whether it can be controlled to an advantageous state without giving the player a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, in the predetermined effect, the pseudo movable object display prioritizes the display of the notification-related image over moving and displaying it in the same way as the movable object, without returning from the second display position to the first display position. Since it is not displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion of execution of the notification effect.

The gaming machine of form A5 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to a first initial display) (a part that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first effect display position, a part that can be displayed by moving the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position on the image display device 5) ,
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
a special performance that notifies that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a decision performance that notifies whether or not the game will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state);
A specific performance that suggests that the special performance will be executed before the special performance is executed (for example, a development performance B that notifies that the final performance will be executed after developing into a strong super reach performance);
is executable,
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display can be displayed in a moving manner in the specific performance and the special performance,
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in the specific performance, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, the display moves from the second display position to the first display. The image is hidden without being moved to the position and displayed, and a suggestive image suggesting execution of the special effect (for example, the mode at the start of display of the reach title image Z51) is displayed in the display area including the second display position. It is possible (see Figure 17-27 (B) (D) to (F)),
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in the special performance, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, the display moves from the second display position to the first display. move to a position and display it, then hide it (see Figures 17-30 (A) to (F)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, before the special effect is executed, the pseudo movable object display prioritizes the display of the suggestive image over moving and displaying it in the same way as a movable object as a structure, and moves from the second display position to Since it is hidden without returning to the 1 display position, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion that the special effect is to be executed. On the other hand, in the special effect, the pseudo movable object display is displayed moving in the same way as the movable object. , it is possible to draw attention to the information that is advantageous to the player without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

The game machine of form A6 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to a first initial display) (a part that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first production display position),
The display means is
moving and displaying the pseudo movable object display from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position);
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (Fig. 17-40 (A) to (C)),
In a display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position, a specific image that emphasizes the moving display of the pseudo movable body display (for example, an image where glass is cracked and shows a plurality of glass shards) It is possible to display an effect image Z71) in which Z71A is scattered (see Figure 17-31),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and by emphasizing the moving display with a specific image, it is possible to give a favorable impression of the moving display to the player. can.

The gaming machine of form A7 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of displaying a pseudo movable body display including a first pseudo movable body display and a second pseudo movable body display different from the first pseudo movable body display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 Moving the display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and moving the second pseudo movable object display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position on the image display device 5. (a movable and displayable part),
The first pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIG. 17-16(B)),
The second pseudo movable object display can be moved and displayed from a first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIG. 17-16(C));
The display means is
The first pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position) (see FIGS. 17-40 (A) to (C)). ),
A movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame. (See Figures 17-40 (A) to (C)),
Display of movement of the first pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position; and Display of movement of the second pseudo movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. (For example, the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is faster than the movement display from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200.) faster than the movement display from to the first specific effect display position (see Figure 17-40),
When the first pseudo movable object display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and when the second pseudo movable object display is moved from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs depending on when it is displayed (for example, in preview performance B, a pattern in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position) When PBY-3 or the pattern PBY-4 that is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position is executed, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect. The rate at which the jackpot gaming state is controlled (jackpot expectation level) differs depending on when the pattern PBY-1 that is moved and displayed at the display position or the pattern PBY-2 that is moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position is executed. (See Figure 17-10, Figure 17-20 (B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which one of the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display is displayed in a moving manner, and the first pseudo movable body display has a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state. The player can recognize the movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display by the difference in speed of the moving display.

The gaming machine of form A8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A7,
A movable body (for example, a first non-mounted movable body M100) that is movable from a first position (for example, a first origin position) to a second position (for example, a first production position) different from the first position;
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a reaction movement of a certain amount of movement is performed (see FIG. 17-36);
When the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, a reaction movement display of a specific movement amount is performed (see FIG. 17-36);
The specific amount of movement is larger than the certain amount of movement (for example, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). The movement amount L12 of the reaction action display is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first presentation position. (see Figure 17-38),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying a pseudo-movable object, it is possible to simulate the same effect as a movable object without installing a movable object, and it is also possible to simulate the reaction that occurs when the movable object moves to the second position. By displaying the motion in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A8,
A movable body (for example, a mounted movable body 32) that can be moved from a first position (for example, the origin position) to a second position (for example, a production position) different from the first position,
The distance from the first display position to the second display position (e.g. movement display distance L2) is longer than the distance from the first position to the second position (e.g. movement distance L1) (Fig. 17-16),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the pseudo movable object display has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the movable object, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A9,
The pseudo movable body display includes a performance display section (for example, performance display section Z100A, Z200A) and a mechanism display section (for example, mechanism display section Z100B, Z200B),
In the moving display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display section reaches the second display position before the effect display section (see FIGS. 17-36 (B1) and (B2));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A10,
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, the movement display of the pseudo movable object display from the first display position to the first display position is faster) The movement amount L2 of the body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2 (see FIG. 17-37),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of form A12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A11,
The movement period of the movable body between the first position and the second position includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases (Fig. 17-39 (A )reference),
The moving display period of the pseudo movable object display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 17-39(B));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the moving display of the pseudo movable object display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable object.

The gaming machine of form A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A12,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light emitting display section (for example, light emitting display sections Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means is capable of displaying the light-emitting display section by emitting light when the pseudo-movable object display is moved to the second display position (the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 to the first display position). After moving to the production position and displaying it, the part that executes the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display part Z108A at almost the same cycle (see Fig. 17-31 (D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pseudo-movable body display moved to the second display position.

The gaming machine of form A14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A13,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light emitting display section (for example, light emitting display sections Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means does not display the light emitting display section when moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display (see FIG. 17-31);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not highlighting the (incomplete) pseudo-movable object display during the moving display, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of form A15 is the gaming machine described in form A13 or form A14,
The movable body includes a light emitting section capable of emitting light (for example, light emitting display sections Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means, when moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display to the second display position, performs a light emitting display of the light emitting display section in a manner common to the light emission of the light emitting section (the effect control CPU 120 After moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect position, the part where the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A are executed at almost the same cycle.See Figure 17-31 (D). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of form A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A17,
The display means can move and display the pseudo movable body display from a first special display position to a second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 (portion where the body display Z200 can be moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position),
a direction in which the pseudo movable object display moves and displays from the first display position to the second display position; a direction in which the pseudo movable object display moves and displays from the first special display position to the second special display position; are different directions (for example, the downward direction in which the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the preview performance A, and the downward direction in which the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in the preview performance A), and This is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position (see FIG. 17-33),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, one pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed from a plurality of display positions, so it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

The gaming machine of form A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The display means moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and then moves the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position in a direction different from the direction in which it is moved and displayed. Can be moved and displayed (see Figure 17-43),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged at the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 12, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of pending memories, game status), commands that specify the occurrence of errors, etc.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the mounted movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 to perform a performance (a process for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable mounting body 32 to the movable mounting body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable mounting body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 controls audio output, lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the mounted movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the mounted movable body 32, etc.). It may also be executed.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S903 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S903, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S905) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S904). Through the recovery process in step S904, a work area is set based on the storage contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), initialization processing (step S906) is executed, and then setting change processing (step S907) is executed. The initialization process in step S906 includes a clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S905 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are met in the setting confirmation process in step S905, a setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are met in the setting change process in step S907, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the settings are being confirmed or that the settings are being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 and the step The setting change process in S907 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S904 and the setting confirmation process in step S905 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S906 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S904 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 14 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 14(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 14(B) shows a configuration example of the first special symbol display result determination table used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 14(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 14(A).

As shown in FIG. 14(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the set value of the second variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 14(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 15, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 16, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S90175, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the mounted movable body 32 , outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 to output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, and commands to the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal) Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S90174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may also be distributed by being installed on a storage device owned by the software. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG in this embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 17-1 to 17-40. In addition, in the following, detailed explanations will be omitted by assigning the same reference numerals to structures that are similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation, or have different shapes, arrangement positions, etc., but have similar functions. Mainly the points different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 17-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG, the mounted movable body 32 is formed to be slightly larger than the mounted movable body 32 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 17-2, a vibration motor 61 built in the stick controller 31A is connected to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. is considered possible. Further, a button LED 62 built in the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the production control CPU 120 can turn on/off the button LED 62.

FIG. 17-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 17-3(A) is just an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 17-3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be set arbitrarily according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 17-3 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit". Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 17-3 (B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) that is transmitted when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) that is transmitted when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted after being temporarily stopped. When power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 100 sends a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, sends an initialization designation command. Send a command.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command D100 is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for specifying the execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance, and as described later, is executed when neither the first pending memory nor the second pending memory exists in the special symbol normal processing. This command is sent based on the demo display settings, and the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the customer waiting demonstration designation command was sent.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 17-3 (A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 17-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 17-4, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and a random number MR3 for determining the regular figure display result. Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. As described later, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section set in the RAM 102, to update various numerical data by software. Numerical data representing part of the random numbers MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " 997'' range.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 17-5(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more decision values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 17-5(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the case of the first special figure special figure game and the case of the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed so that the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state where game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 17-6(A) shows an example of the structure of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table in this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the jackpot type is selected from among a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, the jackpot types in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 17-6(B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types include high-accuracy control and time-saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10 round (10R) variable probability jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game based on "Probable Variable Jackpot C", a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called 2 rounds), and a special This is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than other jackpot games. Furthermore, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are not executed.

Also, although not particularly illustrated, the small winning game state in this embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as that of the variable jackpot C. This is an open period (0.1 seconds in this embodiment). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

In other words, in this embodiment, if it is decided to make a "probable variable jackpot C" or "small win", a variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in Figure 17-7). At the same time, as a variable display result, the chance number is displayed in a stopped state, and furthermore, the opening patterns of the special variable winning ball device 7 are the same, so from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7, , since it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a "probable variable jackpot C" in which the variable probability control is executed or a "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the variable probability control being executed, After the end of a jackpot game or a small win game, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game while making him/her expect that probability change control is being executed.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot A and the probability variable jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment). The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 17-6(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 17-6 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, depending on the fact that the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first or second special map game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 17-6 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to the super reach variation pattern, normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided, and in this case, the jackpot expectation level (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach variation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, . . . may be different. Further, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach variation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach variation pattern may be of only one type, similar to the normal reach variation putter.

Incidentally, the variation pattern in this embodiment includes a special winning variation pattern (corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C"). PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 17-7, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. Also, among the super reach variation patterns, for the super reach β and super reach γ variation patterns, the variable display period is longer (60 seconds) than the variable display period (50 seconds) of the super reach α variation pattern. has been done.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 17-8 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the gaming state, the display result of the variable display to be executed, and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-8 (A), when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot in the normal gaming state (low base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and the corresponding Using jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, change the fluctuation patterns into PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern). Determine from. In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B in the normal gaming state (low base state), select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to change the variable display result. The pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot variation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot variation pattern).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 17-8 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern judgment table A and the jackpot variation pattern judgment table B, the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is It's different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. Assigned. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. ing. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot A or a variable probability jackpot B, the variation pattern of the super reach is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. In addition, since super reach β is easier to determine than super reach α, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a definite variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern judgment table, and use the special winning variation pattern judgment table to change the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). In other words, in this embodiment, since the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern in the case where the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C and the case where the variable display result is a small win, the player can change the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α variation pattern), and PA2 -3 (variation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the error variation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Seven determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using variation pattern determination table B, change the variation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α deviation), and PA2 -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the variation pattern determination table B for failure, 700 determination values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Seven determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α deviation), and PA2 -3 (variation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the error variation pattern determination table C, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Seven determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is "off", the special figure variable display time is changed from the normal one based on the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure being 3, 4, etc. The rate at which variable display is executed is higher with shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3) that are shorter than non-reach variation patterns (PA1-1), thus preventing games from becoming too long. At the same time, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-8(B), if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot in the high base state, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (Normal Reach Jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (Super Reach α Jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (Super Reach β Jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (Super Reach γ Jackpot fluctuation pattern). Jackpot fluctuation pattern). In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B in the low base state, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Determined from (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot), and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot) .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 17-8(B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, the determination values for PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4 are The number of allocations is different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 97 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. 250 judgment values are allocated to PB1-4. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 50 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 347 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. , 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot A or a variable probability jackpot B, the variation pattern is higher than that of super reach β or super reach γ at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. Since the variation pattern is easier to determine, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a definite variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern judgment table, and use the special winning variation pattern judgment table to change the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). In other words, in this embodiment, since the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern in the case where the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C and the case where the variable display result is a small win, the player can change the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach β deviation pattern), and PA2 -4 (super reach γ deviation variation pattern).

Specifically, in the variation pattern determination table D for failure, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 80 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Ten determination values are assigned to PA2-3, and seven determination values are assigned to PA2-4.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is "off" in the high base state (time saving state), based on the time saving state, the special figure variable display time will change compared to the normal non-reach Since the variable display is executed more frequently with the shorter variable pattern (PA1-4) than the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display results are It is possible to shorten the time it takes to hit the jackpot. Note that the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (super reach γ) are fluctuation patterns that can only be executed in the high base state (time saving state).

The RAM 102 in this embodiment is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a regular figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control timer setting section. It includes a control counter setting section and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the holding number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the holding number, and the second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The standard figure holding storage section stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the holding numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and stores the normal figure display result judgment data extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 of is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting section, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and are periodically counted according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 17-2 is provided with a performance control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. This performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The effect control flag setting section includes a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values for each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the buffer number 1-0 corresponds to the variable display being executed due to the pending memory of the first special figure, and the buffer number 1-1 to buffer number 1 corresponds to the pending memory 1 to 4 of the first special figure. -4, Buffer number 2-0 corresponding to the variable display being executed due to the pending memory of the second special figure, Buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to the pending memory 1 to 4 of the second special figure The data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer is set up with entries that can store data such as starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, pending storage number notification command, etc. in association with each of them. It is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The four commands that make up one set, the starting opening prize designation command, the symbol specification command, the fluctuation category specification command, and the pending storage number notification command, are the buffer numbers corresponding to the starting opening winning prize specification command and the pending storage number notification command. is stored in the entry.

The storage contents of the storage areas (entries) corresponding to buffer numbers 1-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the first special figure will be stored in the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1") when the start condition is satisfied. ), the contents of the buffer number ``1-0'' that stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is met are shifted upward one by one as described later. , is cleared in the special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends. Similarly, the storage contents of the storage areas (entries) corresponding to buffer numbers 2-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the second special figure will be stored in the highest pending storage (buffer number "2") when the start condition is satisfied. -1"), the buffer number "2-0" is shifted upward one by one as will be described later, and the buffer number "2-0" is shifted upward one by one as will be described later. The stored contents are cleared in a special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the performance control CPU 120 sends a command to the beginning of an empty entry among buffer numbers 1-1 to 1-4 of the receiving command buffer (the lowest buffer number). When a starting prize is entered into the second starting winning slot, the starting winnings are stored starting from the beginning of the empty entry among buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4 (the entry with the lowest buffer number). . At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the command buffer received at the time of starting winning is an entry (buffer number "1-0" or "2- The data stored in the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1" is deleted and stored in the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1"). The stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol pending memory is finished, each command stored in buffer number "1-0" is deleted and stored in buffer number "1-1". Each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-1". The commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". be done. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(Production during super reach)
Here, the performance during super reach will be explained based on FIG. 17-9. FIG. 17-9 is a diagram showing execution periods of various effects in normal reach and super reach.

As shown in FIG. 17-9, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the normal reach variation pattern or the super reach variation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 changes the variable display mode to the normal reach display mode after starting the variable display. Based on this, a normal reach effect is performed as a variable display effect. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, after executing the normal reach effect, a super reach effect (weak super reach effect or strong super reach effect) is performed as a variable display effect based on the variable display mode being set to the super reach effect. After finishing the reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

In addition, in the normal reach performance in the normal reach variation pattern or super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the performance control CPU 120 determines the possibility (expected) that the variable display result will be a jackpot as a performance different from the variable display performance. It is possible to execute a preview performance A or a preview performance B that foretells the event (degree). Further, in the normal reach performance in the super reach variation pattern, it is possible to execute a development performance A that notifies the player that the normal reach performance will develop into a weak super reach performance (content that is advantageous to the player).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls a development performance B that notifies that a weak super reach performance in the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach performance (content that is advantageous to the player). It is possible to execute a development-suggesting performance that suggests the possibility that It is possible to execute development effect B that notifies the user of the content).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a determined performance that notifies that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a miss in a strong super reach performance in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ). .

In this way, in the variation pattern where the normal reach is off, the normal reach effect will not develop into a weak super reach effect and result in a jackpot or miss, and in the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the weak super reach effect will occur in the normal reach effect. In the super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ), a weak super reach performance develops into a strong super reach performance.

In other words, super reach α is a weak super reach with higher expectations than normal reach, and super reach β and γ are strong super reaches with higher expectations than weak super reach (jackpot expectation; normal reach < super reach). α<super reach β<super reach γ).

In addition, for normal reach and super reach α, β, and γ, different types of normal reach effects and super reach effects may be executed, or super reach effects of common or at least partially similar types may be executed. It may be executed. Further, the types of super reach are not limited to the above three types, and may be one or two types, or four or more types.

In the characteristic part 241SG, in the above-mentioned preview performance A, preview performance B, development performance A, B, development suggestion performance, and final performance, the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, may be moved, and the first pseudo movable body display described later. It is possible to move and display the second pseudo movable body display. Therefore, before explaining the specific contents of each effect, the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display will be explained.

(Flow of development of pachinko machines)
First, in order to understand how the pachinko gaming machine 1 was equipped with the above-described mounted movable body 32, first pseudo movable body display, second pseudo movable body display, etc., we will explain the development of the pachinko gaming machine 1. An outline of the flow will be explained based on FIG. 17-12. FIG. 17-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development flow of a pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 17-12, when the development of a given pachinko machine (for example, pachinko machine 1) begins, the first thing to do is to clarify what to convey to the game parlor and the players, and what they want the players to feel. A proposal is created based on the specifications (step 241SGS001). Specifically, consideration will be given to the game content, highlights, specs, game flow, presentation structure such as reach, board structure, movable objects (structures), etc. for the relevant machine.

Next, based on the proposal, prototypes (primary prototypes, design mocks) of the board (gaming board), videos and materials that can be visualized with variable displays, spec confirmation tables, etc. are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage of creating this prototype, for example, it was planned to mount multiple movable bodies, but there were reasons why it was not possible to mount multiple movable bodies (for example, lack of space such as interference with other movable bodies, cost, etc.) Problems such as durability may occur.

Next, images such as variable display and effects are created (step 241SGS003). Here, regarding the production video, based on the design and motion of the movable body that could not be mounted due to a problem in step 241SGS002, a pseudo movable body display video that imitates the movable body that could not be mounted is created. . Furthermore, since the movement display using the pseudo-movable object display has a lower impact than when moving a movable object that is not mounted, for example, the reaction display operation when the moving object is displayed and stopped, or the speed of the movement display is lower. It is often displayed in a deformed manner (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, create a prototype (secondary prototype) of the board (gaming board) that includes images of variable displays and effects, and check the variable displays, core effects, movement of movable objects, etc. (step 241SGS004), If there is no problem, molds and the like for the board (game board) are created (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by installing multiple movable bodies that can provide impactful performances to players, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect and diversify the performances, but due to the various problems mentioned above, it is not possible to actually It is often difficult to install multiple devices. Therefore, based on the design and operation of the movable body that could not be mounted, a moving display of a pseudo movable body display that imitates the movable body that could not be mounted is increasingly used.

In the following, the pachinko game machine 1 as the feature part 241SG was planned to be equipped with a plurality of movable bodies at the development stage, but due to the various problems mentioned above, one movable body ( For example, it has been decided to mount the movable body 32), and the other movable bodies (for example, the first movable body M100 and the second movable body M200) have not been determined to be mounted, so they are not mounted. In place of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, a first pseudo movable body display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 and a movement display imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200 are used. A description will be given assuming that the moving display of the second pseudo movable body display is adopted.

In addition, in the above example, the pseudo movable body display was adopted as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, which were ultimately not mounted, but the present invention applies to this. Although it is possible to mount a movable body, there are cases where a pseudo movable body display is intentionally used in order to diversify the presentation. It is also possible to use a pseudo movable body display that imitates a movable body that is not scheduled to be installed at the development stage (for example, a virtual movable body, a movable body that is installed or scheduled to be installed in another model, etc.).

(Mounted movable body 32)
The mounting movable body 32 will be explained below based on FIGS. 17-13. In FIGS. 17-13, (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the movable mounting body, and (B) is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the movable mounting body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 17-13(A), the mounted movable body 32 is formed into a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is composed of a production section 32A and a mechanism section 32B, each having a decoration etc. on the front surface. By supporting the left and right sides of the mechanism section 32B extending in the left and right sides, respectively, by the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, the upper origin position (FIG. 17-13 (A) ) and a production position below the origin position (the position shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 17-13(A)). Note that the mechanism section 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R to the performance section 32A.

The drive mechanisms 201L, 201R include mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R, drive gears 203L, 203R fixed to the drive shafts of the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R, and driven gears 204L, 204R that mesh with the drive gears 203L, 203R. , rotation shafts 205L, 205R that face in the vertical direction and have driven gears 204L, 204R fixed to their lower ends, movable bodies 206L, 206R inserted into the rotation shafts 205L, 205R, and mounted movable body 32 are held at the origin position. It mainly includes mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R that can be mounted, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see FIG. 17-2) that is built in the production section 32A and can emit a light emitting part 208A consisting of the letter "X".

In the mounted movable body 32, the left and right ends (guided parts) of the mechanism section 32B are inserted (guided) into the rotation shafts 205L, 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and are locked by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L, 207R. This allows it to be held at the origin position. When the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on and released from the locked state while being held at the home position, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped by its own weight from the home position, and the left and right ends of the mechanism section 32B are comes into contact with the movable bodies 206L, 206R and is restricted from moving downward, thereby stopping at the presentation position.

Further, a spiral groove 205A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating shafts 205L, 205R, while a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked in the groove 205A is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the movable bodies 206L, 206R. Since the rotary shafts 205L and 205R are formed and rotation around the rotary shafts 205L and 205R is restricted, it is possible to move vertically by rotating the rotary shafts 205L and 205R in forward and reverse directions using the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R. It is said that Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can fall from the origin position to the production position by its own weight, and after falling, the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R rotate the rotating shaft 205L as shown in FIG. 17-13(B). , 205R to raise the movable bodies 206L and 206R, they rise from the production position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(First pseudo movable display and first non-mounted movable object)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be explained based on FIGS. 17-14. 17-14, (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body.

The first pseudo movable object display Z100 shown in FIG. 17-14(A) was planned to be installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in FIG. 17-14(B), but due to various circumstances, it was not installed. The image is said to be a model of the first non-mounted movable body M100.

The first non-mounted movable body M100, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, is composed of a production section M100A and a mechanism section M100B, which are formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front and decorated with decorations etc. The left side of the mechanism section M100B extending leftward is supported by the drive mechanism M101 disposed on the left side of the image display device 5, so that the upper first origin position (2 in FIG. 17-14(B)) It is possible to move in the vertical direction between the origin position (indicated by the dotted chain line) and the first presentation position below the first origin position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 17-14(B)).

The drive mechanism M101 includes a movable motor M102, a drive gear M103 fixed to a drive shaft of the movable motor M102, a driven gear M104 that meshes with the drive gear M103, and a driven gear M104 fixed to a lower end thereof and facing in the vertical direction. A rotation axis M105, a movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounted movable body M100 at the first origin position, a movable body M106 inserted into the rotation axis M105, and built in the production part M100A, when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a circular light emitting portion M108A and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) capable of emitting light.

In addition, the effect part M100A has a striped decoration on the front side and has four effect movable parts M110A to M110D arranged around the light emitting part M108A, and the effect movable parts M110A to M110D are arranged in the first part adjacent to each other. It is possible to change between a presentation state (the state shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 17-14(B)) and a second presentation state in which the presentation movable parts M110A to M110D are radially separated from the light emitting part M108A.

The first non-mounted movable body M100 is configured such that the left end part (guided part) of the mechanism part M100B is inserted (guided) into the rotation shaft M105 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and is locked by the movable body solenoid M107. 1 It is held at the origin position. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on and released from the locked state while being held at the first origin position, the first non-mounted movable body M100 is dropped by its own weight from the first origin position, and the mechanism part M100B The left and right end portions of the movable body M106 come into contact with the movable body M106, and downward movement is restricted, so that the movable body M106 is stopped at the first presentation position.

Further, a spiral groove M105A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M105, while a locking portion (not shown) capable of locking in the groove M105A is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the movable body M106, and Since the rotation around the rotation axis M105 is restricted, the rotation axis M105 can be moved in the vertical direction by rotating the rotation axis M105 in forward and reverse directions using the movable body motor M102. Therefore, the first non-mounted movable body M100 can fall from the first origin position to the first performance position by its own weight, and after falling, the movable body motor M102 rotates the rotation axis M105 to move the movable body M106. By raising it, it rises from the first performance position to the first specific origin position, and is held at the first origin position by the movable body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 17-14(A), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is an image imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100, and includes a production display section Z100A corresponding to the production section M100A, and a mechanism section. It has a mechanism display section Z100B corresponding to M100B and a light emitting display section Z108A corresponding to light emitting section M108A. The display can be moved in the vertical direction between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position (see FIG. 17-16(B)). ), the display can be moved in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and a first effect display position corresponding to a position different from the first effect position (Fig. 17-17(A)). Furthermore, the production section M100A has production movable display parts Z110A to Z110D corresponding to the production movable parts M110A to M110D, and a first production display state corresponding to the first production state and a second production display state corresponding to the second production state. It is possible to change the performance display state.

(Second pseudo movable display and second non-mounted movable object)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be explained based on FIGS. 17-15. 17-15, (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the second pseudo movable object display, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body.

The second pseudo movable object display Z200 shown in FIG. 17-15(A) was planned to be installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 17-15(B) and (C), but due to various circumstances, it was not installed. The image is said to be a model of the second non-mounted movable body M200 that has been mounted.

Regarding the second non-mountable movable body M200, at the beginning of development there were two mounting plans with different operating modes (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in Figure 17-15 (B) and mounting plan 1 shown in Figure 17-15 (C)). Mounting plan 2) was devised, but due to development reasons, the second non-mountable movable object itself could not be mounted, so as the second pseudo movable object display Z200, a movement corresponding to mounting plan 1 explained below was used. display and a moving display corresponding to installation plan 2 can be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 17-15(B) and (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, has a production part M200A that is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the front and has decorations on the front surface. The lower end of the mechanism part M100B is supported by the first drive mechanism M201A disposed below the image display device 5 (installation plan 1: FIG. B)), and a second presentation device (installation plan 2: see FIG. 17-15(C)) supported by a second drive mechanism M201B with the upper end of the mechanism section M100B disposed above the image display device 5. are incorporated into each of the.

As shown in FIG. 17-15(B), the first drive mechanism M201A includes a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202, and a rotating body rotated by the movable body motor (not shown). M203, and a guide rail M204 that guides the production section M200A in a vertically movable manner. The mechanism part M200B has one end supported so as to be rotatable about a rotation axis pointing in the front-rear direction with respect to the base member M202, and a connecting shaft M205 protruding from the peripheral edge of the front surface of the rotary body M203 that slides. A long hole M206 is formed into which it can be inserted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A rotates the rotating body M203 by the movable body motor (not shown) and rotates the mechanism part M200B around the rotation axis. The first specific origin position below (the origin position indicated by the two-dot chain line in Fig. 17-15(B)) and the first specific production position above the first specific origin position (indicated by the solid line in Fig. 17-15(B)) It is possible to move vertically between the two positions.

In addition, the production section M200A includes a rotating section M207 that is circular in front view, and a plurality of (for example, 5) light emitting sections M208A to M208E provided on the rotating section M207 with non-mounted movable LEDs (not shown) that can emit light. , the non-mounted movable LED (not shown) lights up while the rotating part M207 rotates, and the light emitting parts M208A to M208E can emit light in multiple colors (for example, 7 colors). There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17-15(C), the second drive mechanism M201B includes a movable body motor M212, a drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M212, and a driven gear that meshes with the drive gear M213. M214, and a rotation shaft M215 that faces in the left-right direction and has a driven gear M214 fixed to the left end thereof. Further, a spiral groove M215A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M215, and a mechanism section M200B extending upward from the production section M200A has a locking mechanism on the inner circumferential surface that can be locked in the groove M215A. (not shown), and rotation about the rotation axis M215 is restricted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B rotates the rotation axis M215 forward and backward by the movable body motor M212, thereby moving the second non-mounted movable body M200 to the second specific origin position on the left side (Fig. 17-15 (C ), the second specific production position on the right side (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 17-15(C)) is movable in the left-right direction, and the second specific origin It is possible to stop at a second intermediate presentation position between the position and the second specific presentation position.

As shown in FIG. 17-15(A), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is an image imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200, and includes a production display section Z200A corresponding to the production section M200A, and a mechanism section. It has a mechanism display section Z200B corresponding to M200B, a rotating display section Z207 corresponding to rotating section M207, and light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E corresponding to light emitting sections M208A to M208E.

In addition, at the beginning of development, it was planned to install a full-color LED as a non-mounted movable object LED (not shown), but due to cost reasons, it may be necessary to install a single-color LED, but the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 By doing so, the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E can be displayed in a plurality of colors (for example, seven colors) without considering cost.

The display is movable in the vertical direction between the first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and the first specific effect display position corresponding to the first specific effect position (Fig. 17-16 (C)), the display can be moved in the left-right direction between a second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and a second specific effect display position corresponding to the second specific effect position (see FIG. 17-17(B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be described based on FIGS. 17-16 and 17-17. 17-16, (A) shows the movable range of the non-mounted movable body, (B) shows the movable display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) shows the movable display area of the second pseudo movable body display. It is a diagram. FIGS. 17-17 are diagrams in which (A) shows a specific movement display area of the first pseudo-movable object display, and (B) shows a specific movement display area of the second pseudo-movable object display.

As shown in FIG. 17-16(A), the mounted movable body 32 has an origin position where the lower part of the presentation part 32A overlaps the upper part of the display area of the image display apparatus 5, and an abbreviation of the display area of the image display apparatus 5. It is possible to move vertically between a production position where the production section 32A and the mechanism section 32B overlap in the center, and the moving distance from the origin position to the production position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 17-16(B), the first pseudo movable object display Z100 has a first initial display position where the lower part of the effect display section Z100A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5; The first initial display is movable in the vertical direction between a first effect display position where the effect display part Z100A and the mechanism display part Z100B are displayed at a position approximately below the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first initial display. The moving display distance from the position to the first effect display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 17-17(A), the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 has a first specific initial display position where the upper part of the effect display part Z100A is displayed at the lower position of the display area of the image display device 5. , a first specific effect display position where the effect display part Z100A and the mechanism display part Z100B are displayed at a position substantially above the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first specific effect display position can be moved in the vertical direction. The specific moving display distance from the specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is set to L2A.

In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, like the first non-mounted movable body M100, has a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. Not only can the movable range between them be moved up and down, but also specific movement is possible between a second initial display position that does not correspond to the first origin position and a second effect display position that does not correspond to the first effect position. The range can be displayed by moving up and down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-16(C), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial stage in which the lower part of the effect display section Z200A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5. The display is movable in the vertical direction between the display position and a first specific effect display position where the effect display part Z200A and the mechanism display part Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5, The moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is set to L3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17-17(B), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is a second specific display in which the right part of the effect display section Z200A is displayed at the left position of the display area of the image display device 5. The display can be moved in the left-right direction between the initial display position and a second specific effect display position where the effect display part Z200A and the mechanism display part Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5. , the moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounted movable body M200, displays the first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and the first specific performance corresponding to the first specific performance position. Not only can the movable range between the display position and the display position be moved in the vertical direction, but also a second specific initial display position that does not correspond to the first specific origin position and a second specific effect display that does not correspond to the first specific effect position It is possible to move and display a specific movable range between the positions in the left and right directions.

Further, the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3 of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. (L2>L1>L3). Further, the movement display distance L2A of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3A of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. and movement display distance L2A (L3A>L2A>L1).

In this way, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 can move and display a movement display distance (L2, L2A, L3A) that is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable object 32. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more impactful performance than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in FIG. 17-16, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are composed of effect display parts Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B. is extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, so that the display is performed as if by the drive mechanism M101, first drive mechanism M201A, and second drive mechanism M201B arranged on the side of the image display device 5. Since the display sections Z100A and Z200A appear to be supported, it is possible to more realistically express a moving display.

In other words, a pseudo-movable object display (pseudo-movable object image) refers to a movable object as a structure that can be operated by a drive mechanism, such as a movable object mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, a movable object not mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, a virtual movable object, etc. This is a simulated display, and is different from an image that does not have a mechanism display section, such as the development notification image Z300 (see FIG. 17-25(H)).

In addition, some display modes may be different from those of the modeled movable body, displays that cannot be realized with the modeled movable body (for example, deformed display, deformed display, etc.), or movement displays (for example, high-speed movement display, etc.) ) is possible as long as it is possible.

In addition, the pseudo-movable object display (pseudo-movable object image) may be an image or moving image created by a computer or the like, or may be an image or moving image of an actually created movable object as a structure. There may be. Furthermore, when these pseudo-movable object displays move, sound effects that are the same as or similar to the sound effects that are output when moving the movable object or the impact sounds that occur when the movable object stops are output, and the pseudo-movable object displays are displayed in a dramatic manner. When the position is reached, the vibration motor 61 vibrates the push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc., and the speakers 8L and 8R output deep bass to generate a pseudo shock, making it more realistic. It becomes possible to provide performances to players.

Next, details of various effects using the above-described mounted movable body 32, first pseudo movable body display Z100, and second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using FIG. 17-10. FIG. 17-10 is a diagram for explaining the content and structure of various effects in Super Reach.

(Preview performance A)
As shown in FIG. 17-10, the preview effect A is executable when the base state is low, and the first specific effect is executed after the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. After being moved to the display position, the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E display light in a color corresponding to the determined performance pattern, thereby suggesting the possibility (expectation level) of a jackpot.

In addition, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that was moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is erased after being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See Figures 17-25 (C) to (F)).

In detail, when pattern PYA-1 is determined in the preview performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278A, which will be described later, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, and when pattern PYA-2 is determined, the light emitting display parts are displayed in white. The display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue. When pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green. When pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green. Displayed in red. Therefore, the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E with the highest expectation of jackpot is red. Note that the emitted light color can be changed in various ways, and if a jackpot is confirmed, the emitted light may be made to emit gold or rainbow colors.

(Preview performance B)
Preview effect B is executable when in the high base state, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. The variable display result is a jackpot depending on whether the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position. This suggests the possibility (expectation level) of

Furthermore, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position (Figure 17-34 (A) (See ~(C)). In addition, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second effect display position to the second initial display position (Figure 17-34 (D) (See ~(F)).

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position (Figure 17-33 (See (A) to (C)). Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific effect display position to the second specific initial display position (Figure 17-33 (See (D) to (F)).

More specifically, when pattern PYB-1 is determined in the preview performance B type determination process of step 241SGS278A, which will be described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position. is displayed, and when pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position, and when pattern PYB-3 is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed. The first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and when pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. The image is moved to the display position and displayed. Therefore, when the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed, and the moving display pattern with the highest jackpot expectation is the first This is a pattern in which the pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position.

In addition, it is better for the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to move and display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, and for the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to move from the second effect display position to the second effect display position. This is faster than moving and displaying from the specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position.

(Development performance A)
In the development effect A, the development to a weak super reach is notified by the mounted movable body 32 moving (falling) from the origin position to the effect position (see FIG. 17-25 (H)). The mounted movable body 32, which has been moved from the origin position to the production position, rises from the production position to the origin position and returns after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In detail, if execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, which will be described later, the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position at the performance start timing, thereby developing to weak super reach. will be notified (see Figure 17-25 (H)). On the other hand, if non-execution is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position at the production start timing, and the development to weak super reach is notified by displaying the development notification image Z300 on the image display device 5. (See Figure 17-25 (G)). In other words, non-execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process, which means that a performance pattern is determined that notifies the development to weak super reach by displaying the development notification image Z300 without causing the mounted movable body 32 to fall. It is.

Incidentally, the development notification image Z300 is an image (display) imitating the mounted movable body 32, but like the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200, it is similar to the movable body. Unlike the pseudo movable object display that is displayed moving, it is an image (display) that only imitates the effect section 32A, and is displayed in a display mode different from the movement of the mounted movable object 32. For example, at the performance start timing, the display is displayed from the beginning at the performance display position corresponding to the performance position of the mounted movable body 32 without any moving display.

(Development suggestion performance)
The development suggestion performance can be executed before the development performance B is executed, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position. After that, based on the fact that the repeated tapping operation of the push button 31B by the player (operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected multiple times within a predetermined period) is detected during the valid operation period, the light is emitted. By changing the display parts Z208A to Z208E to the light emitting display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, it is suggested that the display color of the character image Z310, which will be described later, may be executed, that is, the possibility that the advanced effect B will be executed.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, an operation promotion image (for example, an image imitating the push button 31B) that promotes the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B during the valid operation period in which the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B in the development suggestion performance is valid. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the button LED 62 (see FIG. 17-2) built into the push button 31B is lit without displaying the button on the image display device 5, the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B is promoted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display device 5 may display an operation promotion display that promotes repeated pressing of the push button 31B during the valid operation period.

In addition, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is such that the character image Z310 related to the model is in the first specific display area of the image display device 5. After being displayed so as to overlap (act) with the second pseudo movable object display Z200 in the area including the effect display position, it is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See Figures 17-26(A) to (J) and Figure 17-27(A)).

More specifically, when pattern PS-1 is determined in the development suggestion production type determination process of step 241SGS278B, which will be described later, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E remain white even if the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, and do not change. When pattern PS-2 is determined, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E change from white to blue in response to repeated presses of the push button 31B, and when pattern PS-3 is determined, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E changes in the order of white → blue → green according to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and when pattern PS-4 is determined, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E change from white → blue → according to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B. Changes from green to red. Therefore, the final light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E with the highest degree of expectation for execution of the advanced effect B is red.

Note that the emitted light color and the change pattern of the emitted light color can be changed in various ways. For example, the emitted light color may change from white to red without changing to blue or green, or the emitted light display color may be set as a color other than white from the beginning. . In addition, the number of lights on the plurality of light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E is increased in response to repeated presses of the push button 31B, so that the degree of expectation for the execution of the development effect B is higher when the number of lights on is larger than when the number of lights is small. It's okay. Furthermore, the degree of expectation may vary depending on the color of the emitted light and the number of emitted light.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, if the repeated press operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period, or if the amount of repeated press operation is small, even if any of patterns PS-2 to PS-4 is determined, the exemplifies a mode in which the luminescent display color does not change according to each pattern PS-2 to PS-4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous press operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period. Alternatively, even if the amount of repeated tapping operations is small, the light emitting display color may be changed to correspond to the determined patterns PS-2 to PS-4 at the timing when the valid operation period ends.

Furthermore, the character image Z310 displayed after the valid operation period ends is a character image Z310 of a color corresponding to the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends. There is.

Note that character images Z310 of different types may be displayed depending on the luminescent display colors of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends. Furthermore, even if the light emitting display colors of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E do not change even though one of the patterns PS-2 to PS-4 is determined as described above, the determined pattern PS-2 to PS-4 The character image Z310 may be displayed in a color corresponding to the color (different color from the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E). Further, the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development performance B)
The developed effect B is that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves and displays from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, thereby developing into a strong super reach effect and executing the decisive effect (game content that is advantageous to the person) will be announced (see Figure 17-27(D)). In addition, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position (Figure 17-27 ( (See D) to (F)).

In addition, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased without moving and displaying from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, a reach title is displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position. By displaying the image Z51 so as to overlap the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in a manner that indicates that it is the time to start displaying the image, the variable display result becomes a jackpot (it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state). ) is suggested.

In detail, if execution is determined in the advanced performance B type determination process of step 241SGS280, which will be described later, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing. By moving and displaying, the development to a strong super reach is announced (see Figure 17-27 (D)). On the other hand, if non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position at the effect start timing, and the reach title image Z51 is displayed on the image display device 5. The development to a strong super reach is notified by displaying it in a ready state (see FIG. 17-27(C)). In other words, when non-execution is determined in the development effect B type determination process, the reach title image Z51 is displayed in a prepared state without moving and displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200, thereby leading to a strong super reach. The effect is to determine a performance pattern that informs the development of.

(Decision performance)
The deciding performance is a performance that concludes the battle between an ally character and an enemy character that was being executed in the super reach performance, and notifies whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. Specifically, for example, after a display is performed in which the friendly character deals the final blow to the enemy character, a display is performed to encourage the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, and the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is The enemy character is moved by moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected and the operation valid period ends. Either a confirmed jackpot notification in which the character is defeated and wins the battle, or a confirmed loss notification in which the mounted movable body 32 is not moved from the origin position to the performance position and is defeated by the enemy character and loses the battle is performed.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the variable display result is a failure, and are patterns in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character and loses the battle, and a failure confirmation notification is performed.Patterns KB-2 and KV-2 is a pattern that is selected when the variable display result is a jackpot, and a jackpot confirmed notification is performed in which the ally character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle.

In addition, in patterns KB-2 and KV-2, the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or the timing when the valid operation period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. Then, a vibration effect is performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, if execution of pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the decision performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, which will be described later, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position at the falling timing of the mounted movable body 32. After moving to , a jackpot confirmed notification is performed, and after returning from the production position to the origin position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first production display position and displays the variable decorative pattern. The display will resume. Then, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, so that the variable display result becomes a jackpot (Fig. 17 -29 (E) to (G), see Figures 17-30 (A) to (F)).

On the other hand, when it is decided to execute pattern KB-1 or KV-1, the movable mounted body 32 does not move from the origin position at the timing of the fall of the movable mounted body 32, and the effect image Z57 in which the glass is cracked is displayed. A failure confirmation notification is performed, and the variable display result becomes a failure (see FIGS. 17-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, regarding the jackpot expectation level according to the execution status of the advanced performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and the advanced performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in super reach β and γ (strong super reach) , will be explained based on FIG. 17-11. FIG. 17-11 is a diagram showing the jackpot expectation level according to the execution status of the advanced performance A and the developed performance B.

As shown in Figure 17-11, pattern A is a pattern in which both development effect A and development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β and γ (strong super reach). Yes, pattern B is a pattern in which the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed, pattern C is a pattern in which the development effect A is executed and the development effect B is not executed, and pattern D is a pattern in which the development effect A is executed and the development effect B is not executed. This is a pattern in which both the development effect A and the development effect B are executed.

In the above, the jackpot expectation is set to increase in the order of pattern A<pattern B<pattern C<pattern D. That is, in the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. In this case, the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without the development performance A being executed. In addition, the ratio of control to a jackpot game state when development performance A and development performance B are executed is higher than when development performance A is executed without execution of development performance B (jackpot expectation level) is high. Furthermore, when the advanced performance A and the advanced performance B are executed, the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state (the jackpot expectation level) is higher than when the advanced performance A and the advanced performance B are not executed.

17-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. 16. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 241SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure pending memory in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning are set. Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 241SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 241SGS271 (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are stored in one buffer number. It is shifted upward by minutes (step 241SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the 4th variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among them. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 6th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277), and if it is a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277). ;Y), executes the preview effect type determination process shown in FIG. 21(A) is executed to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the advanced performance A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). When the pattern is not a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), the process advances to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 17-19, in the preview performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the targets of the preview performance are normal reach and super reach, so specifically, the variable display results are jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or miss. The variable display result designation command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, and the variation pattern specification command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded from the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is a low base state (time saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is a low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), the random number for determining the preview performance is determined. At the same time, the performance pattern of the preview performance A is determined using the preview performance type determination table A shown in FIG. 17-20(A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, if it is not in the low base state, that is, if it is in the high base state (step 241SGS302; N), a random number for determining the preview performance is extracted, and a table B for determining the preview performance type shown in FIG. 17-20 (B) is extracted. The performance pattern of preview performance B is determined using (step 241SGS304).

As shown in Figure 17-20 (A), in the table for determining the type of preview effect A, "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4" are selected. For each, if the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot (any of variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, if the super reach is off, if the normal reach is off. A different judgment value is assigned to each of them so that the number of judgment values shown in FIG. 17-20(A) is obtained.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3" and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", Eight determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3" and two determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4."

By assigning judgment values in this way, if a variable display results in a variable jackpot, "Pattern PYA-4" will be determined at the highest rate, and in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot, "Pattern PYA-4" PYA-3" is determined at the highest rate, and when the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, the pattern PYA-1 is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, and "Pattern PYA-4" > "Pattern PYA-3" > "Pattern PYA-2" > "Pattern PYA-1" has the lowest jackpot expectation. Become. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

As shown in Figure 17-20 (B), in the table for determining the type of preview effect B, "Pattern PYB-1", "Pattern PYB-2", "Pattern PYB-3", and "Pattern PYB-4" are selected. For each, if the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot (any of variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, if the super reach is off, if the normal reach is off. A different judgment value is assigned to each of them so that the number of judgment values shown in FIG. 17-20(B) is obtained.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3" and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYB-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYB-2", Eight determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3" and two determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4."

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined at the highest rate, and in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined at the highest rate. PYB-3'' is determined at the highest rate, and when the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, the pattern PYB-1 is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "Pattern PYB-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, and "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-2" > "Pattern PYB-1" has the lowest jackpot expectation. Become. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, an example is given in which the determination ratio of each pattern is the same in the table for determining the type of preview performance A for the low base state and the table for determining the type of preview performance B for the high base state, The present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may be made different between the table for determining the type of preview performance A and the table for determining the type of preview performance B.

Returning to FIG. 17-19, in step 241SGS305, the preview presentation type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306, and a period until the start of the performance is set in the preview performance start wait timer (step 241SGS306), and the process is ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-21, in the advanced performance A type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of development effect A is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or It is sufficient to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach using the variable display result specification command, and to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach using the variation pattern specification command. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of development performance A.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the type of advanced performance, and determines the performance pattern of the advanced performance A using the table for determining the type of advanced performance A shown in FIG. 17-21(B) (step 241SGS312 ).

As shown in Figure 17-21 (B), in the table for determining the type of advanced performance A, the variable display results are variable display results for each of the "non-execution" and "execution" patterns (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot). The judgment values shown in Figure 17-21 (B) are as follows: It is assigned as a value number.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 10 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 90 determination values are assigned to "execution". Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is outside the super reach, 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 20 determination values are assigned to "execution". Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is outside the normal reach, 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution". In other words, when the normal reach is off, the development effect A is not executed because it does not develop into a weak super reach effect.

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a definite variable jackpot or non-probable variable jackpot in the variable display, "Execution" is determined at the highest rate, and if the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, “Not executed” is determined at the highest rate. In other words, when the development effect A is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot is higher than when it is not executed. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 17-21(A), in step 241SGS313, the advanced effect A type determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, and a period until the start of the performance is set in the advanced performance A start wait timer (step 241SGS314), and the process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 17-18, after executing the process of step 241SGS278B, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variation pattern in the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS279), and If it is a pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), execute the development suggestion performance type determination process shown in FIG. 17-22(A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development suggestion performance in the variable display (step 241SGS280), executes the advanced effect B type determination process shown in FIG. The final performance B type determination process shown in A) is executed to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the final performance in the variable display (step 241SGS282). When it is not a super reach variation pattern, that is, when it is a normal reach variation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), the process proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 17-22(A), in the development suggestion performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS321). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the targets of the preview performance are normal reach and super reach, so specifically, the variable display results are jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or miss. The variable display result designation command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, and the variation pattern specification command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded from the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts the random number for determining the development suggestion performance, and determines the performance pattern of the development suggestion performance using the table for determining the development suggestion performance type shown in FIG. 17-22(B) (step 241SGS322 ).

As shown in Figure 17-22 (B), in the table for determining the type of advanced suggestion effect, "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" are For each, if the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot (any of variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, if the super reach is off, if the normal reach is off. A different judgment value is assigned to each of them so that the number of judgment values shown in FIG. 17-20(A) is obtained.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-3" and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 5 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-4".

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "Pattern PS-4" is determined at the highest rate, and in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot, "Pattern PS-4" is determined at the highest rate. "Pattern PS-3" is determined at the highest rate, and if the super reach is off, "Pattern PS-1" is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "Pattern PS-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, and "Pattern PS-4" > "Pattern PS-3" > "Pattern PS-2" > "Pattern PS-1" has the lowest jackpot expectation. Become. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 17-22(A), in step 241SGS323, the development suggestion production type determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, where a period until the start of the performance is set in the development suggestion performance start wait timer (step 241SGS324), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-23(A), in the advanced performance B type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the targets of the preview performance are normal reach and super reach, so specifically, the variable display results are jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or miss. The variable display result designation command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, and the variation pattern specification command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded from the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts the random number for determining the advanced performance, and determines the performance pattern of the advanced performance B using the table for determining the type of advanced performance B shown in FIG. 17-23 (B) (step 241SGS332). .

As shown in Figure 17-23 (B), in the table for determining the type of advanced performance B, the variable display results are variable display results for each of the "non-execution" and "execution" patterns (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, Probable Variable Jackpot C), Non-probable Variable Jackpot, Super Reach Miss, and Normal Reach Miss, the judgment values are shown in Figure 17-23 (B). It is assigned as a value number.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 30 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 70 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach β/γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to “non-execution” and 70 judgment values are assigned to “execution”. . Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is outside the super reach α, 100 determination values are assigned to “non-execution”. In other words, if the super reach α is off, the development effect B is not executed because it will not develop into a strong super reach effect.

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a definite variable jackpot or non-probable variable jackpot in the variable display, "Execution" is determined at the highest rate, and if the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, “Not executed” is determined at the highest rate. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the advanced performance B is executed than when it is not executed. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 17-23(A), in step 241SGS333, the advanced effect B type determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, and a period until the start of the performance is set in the development performance B start waiting timer (step 241SGS334), and the process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 17-24(A), in the final performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final performance type shown in FIG. 17-24(B) based on the variable display result specified in step 241SGS301. The performance pattern of the final performance is determined using the table for determining the performance (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined performance type is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), a period until the performance starts is set in the performance start wait timer (step 241SGS343), and the process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 17-24(B), in the table for deciding the type of performance, there is a "pattern" that displays an operation promotion display that enables the operation of the push button 31B and encourages the player to perform a single press operation of the push button 31B. KB-1'', ``Pattern KB-2'', ``Pattern KV-1'', ``Pattern KV-'' which displays an operation promotion display that enables the operation of the stick controller 31A and encourages the player to pull the stick controller 31A. 2), if the variable display result is a guaranteed variable jackpot (any of variable variable jackpot A, variable variable jackpot B, variable variable jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, or if the super reach is off. Different determination values are assigned so that the number of determination values is shown in FIG. 17-24(B).

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KB-2" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KV-2". Assigned. In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KV-2". ing. In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach β/γ, 70 judgment values are assigned to “pattern KB-1” and 30 judgment values are assigned to “pattern KV-1”. is assigned.

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "pattern KV-1" in which the operation target is the stick controller 31A is determined at the highest rate, and a non-probability variable jackpot is determined. In this case, "Pattern KB-2" in which the operation target is the push button 31B is determined at the highest rate, and when the super reach is off, "Pattern KB-1" in which the operation target is the push button 31B is determined. ” is determined with the highest percentage. In other words, when the stick controller 31A is the operation target, the expectation of a variable jackpot is higher than when the push button 31B is the operation target. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the random number for determining the preview performance, the random number for determining the development performance A, the random number for determining the development suggestion performance, the random number for determining the development performance B, and the random number for determining the final performance are each random numbers in the range of 1 to 100. Any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of judgment values for these various production-determining random numbers is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these various production-determining random numbers can be changed as appropriate. All you have to do is decide. Further, a performance determining random number counter for generating these various performance determining random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and the performance determining random number counter is updated every timer interrupt by random number updating processing. Further, a common random number may be used as the random numbers for determining these various effects.

In addition, although this feature section 241SG has exemplified a form in which production patterns of various productions are determined in various production type determination processing, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the above productions, for example, characters appear. It may also be possible to decide to execute a preview effect such as a character preview effect in which the preview image changes in stages, a step-up preview in which the preview image changes step by step, or a group preview in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area. When determining, since the timing to start the preview performance differs depending on the format of the preview performance, different periods depending on the format of the preview performance may be set in the preview performance start wait timer, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 17-18, in step 241SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects the performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 241SGS284).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 241SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 241SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the production control CPU 120 writes image data that is being displayed in a variable manner, including image data that indicates the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right, into the VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal according to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting process (step 241SGS288).

(Example of Super Reach β production operation)
Next, an example of the performance operation of super reach β will be explained based on FIGS. 17-25 to 17-31. FIGS. 17-25 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of the super reach β mainly in the normal reach. In FIGS. 17-26, (A) to (J) are diagrams mainly showing examples of production operations in weak super reach. In FIGS. 17-27, (A) to (F) are diagrams similarly showing examples of performance operations in weak super reach. 17-28, (A) to (D) are diagrams mainly showing examples of production operations in strong super reach. In FIGS. 17-29, (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of strong super reach performance. FIGS. 17-30 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of production operations after notification of jackpot confirmation. FIGS. 17-31 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable object display. FIG. 17-32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light emitting display section and the mounted movable body LED.

Below, examples of various performance operations in the variable display period based on the variation pattern of super reach β will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 17-25(A), the performance control CPU 120 variably displays decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the variation pattern of super reach β based on the occurrence of a starting prize. Start. In addition, in the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5, small numbers corresponding to the first pending memory number (for example, the number "2"), the second pending memory number (for example, the number "0"), and the decorative pattern are displayed. A display area 5SL for displaying symbols (for example, arrows "↓↓↓") is provided, and small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative symbols.

In addition, regarding the first suspended memory number, the second suspended memory number, small symbols, and an error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z100 Since it is displayed on the front side (upper layer) than the movable body display Z200, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pending memory number, second pending memory number, and small While the visibility of the symbols and error displays is prevented from decreasing, the decorative symbols are displayed further back (lower layer) than the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200. Therefore, the visibility of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is prevented from being reduced due to overlapping of decorative patterns.

After starting the variable display, as shown in FIG. 17-25(B), when the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, the normal reach effect as the variable display effect of the decorative symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 17-25(C), the performance control CPU 120 moves the second pseudo movable object display Z200 to the first specific initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance A when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. After being displayed in the first specific effect display position (see FIG. 17-25 (D)), as shown in FIG. By displaying the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E in a display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1 to PYA-4), a notice effect A indicating that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state is executed. Further, an effect image Z60 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position.

Note that the effect image Z60 is displayed in a manner corresponding to the luminescent display colors of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on the pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and the display size is small, and the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on the pattern PYA-4. When the light emitting display color of Z208E is red, it is preferable that the effect image Z60 is red and the display size becomes large according to the expectation level.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-25(F), the effect image Z60 is erased, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and then the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed. By erasing the pseudo movable body display Z200, the preview performance A is ended. Thereafter, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in a display area 5SR provided at the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5 in a manner that is slightly larger than the small pattern.

If non-execution of development performance A is determined in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 17-25 (G), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 is held at the origin position without falling, a development notification image Z300 is displayed, and an effect image Z61A is displayed around it, to notify that a weak super reach performance will develop. In addition, if the execution of the development effect A is determined, as shown in FIG. 17-25 (H), at the start timing of the development effect A, the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on and the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around it to notify that a weak super reach performance will develop.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, when the mounted movable body 32 is executed as the development effect A, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is not executed. Even if it has been decided not to perform (the fall of the player), by displaying the development notification image Z300, it is possible to notify that the performance will develop into a weak super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 17-26(A), after the execution period of the developed effect A ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the weak super reach effect by displaying the character image Z310, and also starts the weak super reach effect by displaying the character image Z310. After the movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position, it is moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position, and the development suggestion effect is started (see FIG. 17-26(B)). At this time, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed so as to partially overlap the character image Z310 on the near side.

Furthermore, when the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position as a development suggestion effect, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed as white light and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is lit. , prompts the operation of the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-26(C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200. Then, if any of the patterns (PS-2 to PS-4) is determined in the development suggestion production type determination process of step 241SGS280, as shown in FIG. The effect image Z62 is enlarged according to the repeated tap operation (the number of detected operations), and the color of the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is changed every time a predetermined period of time elapses. Suggests that B is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17-26(E), a blackout display is performed in which the background image is darkened while maintaining the luminescent display colors of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E even after the valid operation period ends. Thereafter, a small-sized character image Z310 having the same color as the luminescent display color of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E when the operation validity period ends is displayed at the upper position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200, and the character image Z310 is also displayed. After displaying the effect image Z63 for emphasis (see Figure 17-26 (F)), temporarily erase the character image Z310 while displaying the effect image Z63 (see Figure 17-26 (G)), and then After displaying the large size character image Z310 (see Figure 17-26 (H)), erase the character image Z310 while displaying the effect image Z63 (see Figure 17-26 (I)), and then Character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 17-26 (J)).

Note that in FIGS. 17-26(E) to (J), in consideration of the appearance of the effect, it is preferable that the light-emitting displays of the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E continue, but that the effect image Z62 is not displayed.

In this way, the character image Z310 of the same color as the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is displayed in a manner that gradually increases from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen, and the character images Z310 of small size, medium size, and large size are displayed. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 17-26(J) in FIG. 17-27, the second pseudo-movable object display is displayed in the area including the first specific effect display position of the second pseudo-movable object display Z200. By overlapping at least a part of the front side of Z200 and making the second pseudo movable object display Z200 visible through the overlapping area, expectations for the execution of the development effect B are more preferably created. can be stimulated.

Furthermore, since the character image Z310 is displayed preferentially in front of the second pseudo-movable object display Z200, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position. While distracting the player's consciousness, it is possible to suitably suggest that the development effect B will be executed by displaying the character image Z310.

Furthermore, although the character image Z310 is displayed in a manner that increases its size in stages, at least the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is enlarged in the area including the first specific effect display position of the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 from the start of display. It may be displayed so as to partially overlap on the near side. Furthermore, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestion image so as to overlap at least a portion of the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-27(A), while displaying the large-sized character image Z310, the effect control CPU 120 moves the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific effect display position to the first position. 1. Erase (hide) without moving to a specific initial display position. Specifically, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is hidden in a manner of gradually fading out as an erased display to emphasize that it has been erased. Thereafter, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by being hidden from display in a manner of gradually fading out.

In the feature section 241SG, as shown in FIG. 17-27(A), the effect control CPU 120 controls the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 to perform the first specific effect while displaying the large-sized character image Z310. Although a mode in which the display position is moved from the display position to the first specific initial display position and is erased (hidden) without being displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 17-26 (F) When the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed as the first specific effect while the character image Z310 is being displayed. It may also be erased (hidden) without being moved from the position to the first specific initial display position.

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not limited to the one where the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 While Z200 is faded out, it may be moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position and erased (hidden).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17-27(B), at the start timing of the development effect B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. Here, if non-execution of the development effect B is determined in the development effect B type determination process of step 241SGS281, as shown in FIG. 17-27(C), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is Moves from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position and erases it without displaying it, and displays the reach title image Z51, which will be described later, in a predetermined manner (for example, the manner at the start of display with high transmittance and low visibility). By doing so, it will be announced that it will develop into a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17-27(D), when the execution of advanced effect B is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. By doing so, it will be announced that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white) during the moving display, and the rotating display part Z207 including the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is displayed. Displayed in a clockwise manner when viewed from the front. Furthermore, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position.

Note that the light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E in FIG. 17-27(D) are different from the development suggestion effect and do not indicate the expectation of a jackpot, but are displayed on the image display device 5 as images of a weak reach effect. The light emitting display color corresponds to the color of the effect image Z65 etc. displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-27(E), after displaying the reach title image Z51, which will be described later, in a predetermined manner (for example, the manner at the start of display with high transmittance and low visibility), As shown in 27(F), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position and is erased (hidden) without being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-28 (A), when the variable display mode is set to the super reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays the reach title indicating the type of super reach effect and the reach indicating the jackpot expectation level. The title image Z51 is displayed to notify that the super reach effect has developed. Next, a super reach performance (for example, a performance that displays an image Z52 of a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see FIG. 17-28(B)). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the super reach display mode has been set, if patterns KB-1 and KB-2 have been determined in the decision performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 17-28(C), an operation promotion image Z53 is displayed to encourage the player to press the push button 31B. On the other hand, if the patterns KV-1 and KV-2 are determined in the final effect type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 17-28 (D). An operation promotion image Z54 is displayed to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A.

The timing when a push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected during the operation validity period during which the operation promotion display is displayed, or a push If the variable display result is a jackpot at the timing when the valid operation period ends without detecting the push operation of the button 31B or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 17-29(E), the mounted movable body 32 A movable body performance is executed in which the object is dropped from the origin position to a performance position on the front side of the display area, and an effect image Z55 is displayed. In addition, in accordance with the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is colored in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color, etc.). Make it emit light.

Note that the effect image Z55 is an effect image including a plurality of glass shard images displayed in the manner of glass cracking and scattering, and is exemplified in a form similar to the effect image Z71 described later, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect image may have a different form from the effect image Z71. For example, by displaying a display in which only a portion of the glass is cracked and scattered as fragments, leaving the remaining portion, the mounted movable body 32 may be displayed overlappingly with the effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5. Even in situations where it is difficult to visually recognize, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to understand what has happened by taking some time.

Further, in the effect image Z55, as well as the effect image Z71 described later, at least one of the plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a scattering manner includes the mounting movable body 32 disposed on the front side of the image display device 5. By displaying a part of the glass fragments in a reflective manner, the positional relationship between the mounted movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer, so that a display with a more three-dimensional effect can be realized.

After that, after moving the mounted movable body 32 from the production position to the origin position, as shown in FIG. 17-29 (F), after displaying the image Z56 indicating that the ally character has won the battle with the enemy character. , as shown in FIG. 17-29(G), the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily stopped and the jackpot confirmed notification is performed. Incidentally, even if the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-30(A), the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in which glass is cracked and glass fragments are scattered in the display area of the image display device 5, and the first pseudo movable The body display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 17-30(B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the effect movable display parts Z110A to Z110D are displayed as the first effect. The display state is changed to the second effect display state. In addition, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped in the same manner as shown in FIG. 17-29 (E). Then, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light emitting display section Z108A is caused to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color).

Here, details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position explained in FIGS. 17-30(A) and (B) are shown in FIG. 17-31. explain.

As shown in FIG. 17-31(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in the display area of the image display device 5, including an image Z71A showing a state in which glass is cracked and a plurality of glass fragments are scattered. At the same time, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. Note that the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 so that a portion thereof is visible below the mounted movable body 32 held at the origin position. Then, as shown in FIG. 17-31(B), when displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first effect display position, -31(A), the amount and moving display speed of the image Z71A showing glass fragments are increased, and the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed on the near side of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 17-31(C) and (D), when displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first effect display position, the glass fragments are smaller than in the state shown in FIG. 17-31(B). The amount and movement display speed of the images Z71A showing the image Z71A are further increased, and these images Z71A are displayed closer than the first pseudo movable body display Z100.

In this way, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100, the effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is added to the first initial display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. position, the first intermediate display position, and the first effect display position, and move only the image Z71A showing the glass fragments in the effect image Z71 from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo movable object display Z100. By displaying it, not only can a three-dimensional effect be created by the image Z71A scattered around, but also the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be made to look like a real structure.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 17-31(C), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is viewed through any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed on the front side of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. The first pseudo-movable body display may be displayed in a visible manner, or may be displayed on any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 17-31(D). By displaying a part of Z100 in a reflective manner, the positional relationship between the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the image Z71A becomes clearer, so that a display with a more three-dimensional effect can be realized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17-31(D), the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, and then moves the performance movable display parts Z110A to Z110D to the first performance display. At the same time, the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A are executed at approximately the same cycle.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-32, after the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 moves to the first effect display position, the effect control CPU 120 moves the light emitting display part Z108A to the first period ta1 to ta2 ( For example, during the production period in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first production display position, a flashing display pattern in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed in the first production display position is a flashing display pattern in which the display is emitted for a period of 33ms) and then is not displayed for a second period ta2 to ta3 (for example, 33ms). While repeating ta1 to ta4 multiple times, the mounted movable body LED 208 is turned on for a first corresponding period (for example, 30 ms) corresponding to the first period, and then a second corresponding period corresponding to the second period (for example, A blinking pattern in which the lights go out for 40 ms) is repeated multiple times over the presentation period ta1 to ta4.

In this way, by executing (synchronizing) the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A at substantially the same period (synchronization), it is possible to more suitably enhance the performance. It should be noted that it is difficult to accurately match (synchronize) the time (for example, 33 ms) in which the light emitting display section Z108A emits light and the time (for example, 30 ms) to light up the mounted movable body LED 208 in the first period ta1 to ta2. Even in such a case, for example, by making the off period of the mounted movable body LED 208 longer than the lighting period, the discrepancy between the light emission display of the light emitting display section Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208 will increase over time. This can be prevented.

Further, during the performance period ta1 to ta4, a vibration performance may be performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. By doing so, the performance can be made more exciting. Note that the driving of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208.

Returning to FIG. 17-30(C), the performance control CPU 120 returns the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second performance display state to the first performance display state, and ends the reduced display of the decorative pattern. , after temporary stop display in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved upward and displayed as shown in FIG. 17-30 (D). As shown in E), the display is moved to the first effect display position and then erased. Then, the combination of determined decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the small symbols are also stopped and displayed in the combination of jackpot symbols.

In this way, after performing the effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 and notifying the jackpot confirmation, by executing the effect of moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100, the jackpot game state is controlled. It is possible to make the player feel it more suitably.

Returning to FIG. 17-29, during the operation validity period during which the operation promotion display is displayed, a single press operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (a single pull operation from the stick controller 31A) If the variable display result is incorrect at the timing when the detection signal (detection signal) is detected, or at the timing when the valid operation period ends without detecting a single push operation of the push button 31B or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A, As shown in (H), the effect image Z57 is displayed without performing the movable body effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the effect position on the front side of the display area, As shown in Figure 17-29 (I), after displaying the image Z58 indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character, the combination of losing symbols is displayed as shown in Figure 17-29 (J). A stop display is performed to notify the failure confirmation. Further, in synchronization with the stop display of the combination of missed symbols, the small symbols are stopped and displayed as the combination of missed symbols.

Note that, for example, when the push button 31B is operated at the start of the valid operation period, and when the push button 31B is not operated during the valid operation period, there will be a difference in the subsequent length, so the operation timing of the push button 31B will be different. The difference in scale caused by 1. The period of fluctuation of the decorative pattern until the pattern is confirmed; 2. Display period of images Z55 to Z58, 3. This may be absorbed by extending or shortening one of the presentation periods of the movable body presentation.

(Example of Super Reach γ production operation)
Next, an example of the performance operation of super reach γ will be explained based on FIGS. 17-33 and 17-34. FIGS. 17-33 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of preview performance B in super reach γ. FIGS. 17-34 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of preview performance B in super reach γ.

Below, we will explain an example of the performance operation of preview performance B executed in the normal reach performance in the variation pattern of super reach γ, and the flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach performance is the same as that of super reach β. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted. Note that the super reach γ is a variation pattern that is selected only when the gaming state is a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 17-33(A), if the pattern PYB-1 is determined in the preview performance type determination process in step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 displays a preview after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of effect B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the second specific initial display position and then moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position (see Figure 17-33 (B)), thereby winning the jackpot. A preview performance B indicating that the game state will be controlled is executed. Further, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed overlappingly in front of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L at the second intermediate effect display position, so that the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed in a variable manner in the decorative pattern display area 5L. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the displayed decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 17-33(C), the effect control CPU 120 erases (deactivates) the second pseudo movable object display Z200 without moving it from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position. indicate.

As shown in FIG. 17-33 (D), if the pattern PYB-2 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 to display a preview after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second specific effect display position (see Figure 17-33 (E)), a jackpot is achieved. A preview performance B indicating that the game state will be controlled is executed. Furthermore, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed overlappingly in front of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C at the second specific effect display position, so that the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the displayed decorative pattern.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17-33(F), the performance control CPU 120 erases (deactivates) the second pseudo movable object display Z200 without moving it from the second specific performance display position to the second specific initial display position. indicate.

As shown in FIG. 17-34(A), if the pattern PYB-3 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 when the pattern PYB-3 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B. At the start timing of performance B, after displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the first performance display position (see FIG. 17-34 (B)), a jackpot game state is established. Preview performance B is executed, which suggests that the system will be controlled by Furthermore, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed overlappingly in front of the decorative patterns that are variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first effect display position. , 5C, and 5R are partially difficult to visually recognize.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17-34(C), the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first effect display position to the first initial display position and erases (hides) it. do.

As shown in FIG. 17-34(D), if the pattern PYB-4 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 to display a preview after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of performance B, after displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the second initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second performance display position (see FIG. 17-34 (E)), a jackpot game state is established. Preview performance B is executed, which suggests that the system will be controlled by Furthermore, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is overlapped and displayed in front of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second effect display position, so that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L. , 5C, and 5R are partially difficult to visually recognize.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17-34(F), the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the second effect display position to the second initial display position and erases (hides) it without displaying it. do.

(Pseudo moving object display and moving object)
Next, pseudo movable object display and movable objects will be explained based on FIGS. 17-35 to 17-40. FIG. 17-35 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 17-36 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 17-37 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 17-38 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 17-39 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 17-40 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable object display and the second pseudo movable object display.

As shown in FIG. 17-35, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is a first non-movable body display Z100 that is different in form, weight, drive mechanism, etc. from the mounted movable body 32, as explained in FIG. 17-14(B). Although this is a pseudo movable body display imitating the mounted movable body M100, the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 are both approximately at the same position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first effect display position Since both the effect position of the mounted movable body 32 are lower than the first initial display position and the origin position, the direction of movement from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 is the origin The direction of movement from the position to the production position is a common downward direction. That is, both the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are movable downward from the first initial display position or origin position above the display area of the image display device 5.

As explained in FIGS. 17-16, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the distance from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position. It is longer than the moving distance L1 (L2>L1).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 17-35 (A') to (C'), the mounted movable body 32 falls (moves) under its own weight from the upper origin position to the lower production position via the intermediate position. While it takes about 300ms, as shown in FIGS. 17-35(A) to (C), the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed from the first initial display position to the first intermediate display position and then to the first effect display. It takes about 100ms to move and display the position. In other words, the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is longer than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position, in addition to the longer moving display distance. It's also fast.

In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 is displayed as a movable mounted structure movable in the same direction (for example, downward) as the first non-mounted movable body M100. In the case where the movable display can be performed from approximately the same position as the mounted movable body 32 in the same direction, the movable display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is better than that of the mounted movable body 32. By making the movement faster than the movement from the origin position to the performance position, it is possible to perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 that is actually mounted, thereby surprising the player. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 17-36 (A') and (B'), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first origin position to the first effect position below the first origin position. At times, the mechanical part M100B comes into contact with the upper part of the movable body M106 and its downward movement is restricted, causing it to stop, and the vibration generated when the movement is restricted causes a reaction motion (bounce) of a predetermined amount of movement. The display is designed to imitate the first non-mounted movable body M100 where the process is performed.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 17-36(A) and (B), the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100. When stopping and displaying at the effect display position, a reaction movement display (bounce display) of a specific amount of movement is performed.

More specifically, the first non-mounted movable body M100 has a cantilevered structure in which only the left side of the production section M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when it moves to the first production position, the mechanism section M100B moves to the moving body M106. Since the mechanism part M100B comes into contact with the upper part of the production part M100A and is restricted from moving downward, a reaction motion due to vibration occurs in the mechanism part M100B before the production part M100A, and then the vibration is transmitted to the production part M100A and a reaction action occurs.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17-36 (B1), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved to the first effect display position, the effect control CPU 120 displays the reaction movement of the mechanism part M100B, and then , as shown in FIG. 17-36 (B2), displays the reaction motion of the production section M100A. By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100, which is different from the mounted movable body 32, is displayed in a more realistic manner (for example, the display imitating the mounted movable body 32 is can be moved and displayed in different modes).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 17-36 (C') and (D'), the mounted movable body 32 has a structure in which the left and right sides of the production section 32A are supported by drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and is moved to the production position. At this time, the mechanism portion 32B comes into contact with the upper portions of the left and right movable bodies 206 and their downward movement is restricted, so that a reaction movement of a predetermined amount of movement is performed due to vibrations generated when the movement is restricted.

Next, the operation mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body in the deciding performance will be explained.

As explained in FIGS. 17-28 to 17-30, the performance control CPU 120 performs a movable body performance in which the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position during the execution period (ta0 to ta10) of the final performance. After executing and notifying the jackpot confirmation, it is possible to execute a pseudo movable object display in which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-37(A), after starting the determined performance at timing ta0, the performance control CPU 120 controls the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or push button 31B within the valid operation period. At the detected timing ta1, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the production position. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position during a period TL1 (for example, about 300 ms) between timings ta1 and ta2, and then performs a reaction motion during a period between timings ta2 and ta3 (for example, about 700 ms).

Thereafter, at timing ta4, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (raised) from the production position to the origin position, and a jackpot confirmation notification is performed. Here, the period TL3 (for example, about 1000 ms) from timing ta4 to ta5 when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the production position to the origin position is the period from timing ta1 to ta2 when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position. It is longer than TL1 (for example, about 300 ms). In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the production position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the production position.

In this way, in a performance using the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position in response to the detection of the player's operation, the game is performed by making it fall faster due to its own weight. On the other hand, when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the performance position to the origin position, it is possible to suppress damage to the mounted movable body 32 due to impact by moving it slowly.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position at timing ta6 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the notification of jackpot confirmation, and displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position, and displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position during the period TL2 from timing ta6 to ta7 (for example, , about 100 ms), and then a reaction movement display is performed during a period from timing ta7 to ta8 (for example, about 900 ms).

Thereafter, at timing ta9, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved (raised) from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, and then the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is erased. Here, during the period TL4 (for example, about 1000 ms) from timing ta9 to ta10 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved to the first It is longer than the period TL2 (for example, about 100 ms) from timing ta6 to ta7 of moving and displaying from the initial display position to the first effect display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position is such that the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display. It is slower than the speed when moving to the position and displaying it.

In this way, in the moving display of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100, the moving display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is made faster than the moving display from the first effect display position to the first initial display position. By doing the same thing as the mounting movable body 32, such as increasing the speed, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 17-37(B), the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position Comparing L2 (movement display distance L2) with the movement amount L1A per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position, it is found that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, which can surprise the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 17-37(C), the amount of movement of the first reaction action display performed when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. L12 is larger than the movement amount L11 of the first reaction motion display performed when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position. Further, the number of times the reaction motion of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed (for example, six times) is greater than the number of times of reaction motion of the mounted movable body 32 (for example, four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. By displaying the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 17-38(A) and (B), the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 to the first effect display position, and the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 The moving display distance L2 of M100 from the first origin position to the first effect display position is the same, and the period TL2 during which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is: It is shorter than the period TL10 during which the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first production position (TL2<TL10). Therefore, the amount of movement L2 per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is as follows: It is larger than the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving from the first origin position to the first presentation position. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is better than the movement display of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first effect display position. It's also fast. By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, which can surprise the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 17-38(C), the amount of movement of the first reaction action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. L12 is the movement amount L11 of the first reaction action display performed when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position, and the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves from the first origin position to the first It is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction movement display performed when moving and displaying to the production position. Further, the number of times the reaction motion of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed (for example, six times) is greater than the number of times of reaction motion of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 (for example, four times). By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. In addition, by displaying in an exaggerated manner the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position or when the mounted movable body 32 moves to the performance position, the game It is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the audience.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined movement amount in the reaction motion of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific movement amount in the reaction motion display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is as follows. Although the first reaction movement and the reaction movement display were compared, it is also possible to compare any reaction movement from the second time onward with the reaction movement display, or the total or average movement amount of multiple reaction movements and the reaction movement. It may also be compared with the displayed total or average movement amount.

In addition, the reaction motion is an example in which the movable body jumps upward due to the reaction when it stops at the second position, but it also includes deformation or vibration of a predetermined part of the movable body due to the reaction. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-39(A), when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the production position to the origin position, or when moving the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first production position to the first origin position. In this case, since drive sources such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R and M101 are used, the performance control CPU 120 changes the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the timing tb1 when movement is started. The first period up to tb2 is increased, the period from timing tb2 to timing tb3 is constant, and the second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4 is decreased. In other words, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate until a first period elapses after starting movement, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate in a second period before the stop position. Stop.

On the other hand, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are moved and displayed is from timing tb1 when they start moving to timing tb4 when they stop, as shown in FIG. 17-39(B). Since the first period for accelerating the movement display and the second period for decelerating the movement display are not necessary, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is changed to the first non-mounted movable body M100. This can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the mounting movable body 32.

Next, the moving display of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 will be explained using FIG. 17-40.

As shown in FIGS. 17-40 (A) to (C), when creating a video in which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, at least the first pseudo A first frame that is an input image for displaying the movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and a second frame that is an input image for displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the first effect display position. , is required.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 17-40 (A') to (B'), when creating a video in which the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. , at least a first frame that is an input image for displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and a first frame that is an input image for displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the first specific effect display position. A second frame, which is an input image, is required.

As explained in FIG. 17-16, the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position, and the first identification of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 The moving display distance L3 is from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and although the moving display distance L2 is longer than the moving display distance L3, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect. The time required to move and display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is approximately 100 ms, while the time required to move and display the display to the display position is approximately 100 ms. Since the difference is 800 ms, the moving display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is better than the movement display from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200. 1 Faster than the moving display to the specific effect display position.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the first frame shown in FIG. Although it is possible to display the images in the order of the second frame shown in 40(C), the frame rate would be lower and the movement would be choppy and unnatural.

Therefore, one interpolation frame shown in FIG. 17-40(B) is inserted between the first frame and the second frame as an input image for displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first intermediate display position. The number of frames of the video is increased to increase the frame rate, and the moving display of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is performed for each display frame at the first initial display position, By performing this in the order of the first intermediate display position and the first effect display position, a natural and smooth moving display can be performed.

In this way, even when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position at high speed, at least one interpolation frame is inserted between the first frame and the second frame. By realizing a natural and smooth moving display, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be quickly moved and displayed without reducing visibility.

On the other hand, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, the first frame shown in FIG. 17-40 (A'), Although displaying the frames in the order of the second frame shown in FIG. 17-40 (B') may be considered, the frame rate would be lower and the movement would be choppy and unnatural.

Therefore, between the first frame and the second frame, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at a plurality of first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific effect display position. As an input image, a plurality of interpolation frames (not shown) are inserted to increase the number of frames of the video and increase the frame rate to realize a natural and smooth moving display, and the first identification of the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is performed. By performing a moving display from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the order of the first specific initial display position, each first intermediate display position, and the first specific effect display position for each display frame, the second The pseudo movable object display Z200 can be displayed moving at a speed slower than the first pseudo movable object display Z100 without reducing visibility.

Also, for example, in the preview performance B, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position. When the moving display PBY-4 is executed, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 moves and is displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position. 1. When PBY-2 is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot state (jackpot expectation level) is different, so the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display have different ratios of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The player can recognize the pseudo movable object display Z200 by the difference in speed of the moving display.

In addition, a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and PBY-4 in which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. When is executed, patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position are executed. Since the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than that when is executed, attention can be drawn to the moving display of the first pseudo movable object display Z100.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position on the image display device 5 and is stopped and displayed at the first effect display position, Although a form in which a reaction movement display (rebound display) of a predetermined amount of movement is displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 17-34 (D) to (E), image display When the device 5 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the second initial display position to the second effect display position and stops and displays it at the second effect display position, a reaction movement display of a predetermined movement amount ( (bounce display) may also be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 17-33(A) and (B), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position on the image display device 5. When stopping and displaying at the second intermediate effect display position, or as shown in FIGS. When moving and displaying from the second specific performance display position to the second specific performance display position and stopping display at the second specific performance display position, a reaction movement display (bounce display) of a predetermined movement amount may be performed.

In addition, the reaction action display performed when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position in the preview effect B is better than the reaction movement display that is performed during the preview effect B. It is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than the reaction movement display performed when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the effect A. By doing so, the moving amount of the preview effect B is larger than that of the preview effect A, so that it can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the reaction action display that is performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position after notification of the jackpot of the pattern PBY-3 of the preview performance B or the decisive performance. However, it is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than the reaction movement display performed when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position in pattern PBY-4 of preview effect B. . By doing so, the reaction motion display is larger when the display is moved downward than when it is displayed while moving upward, so that the display can be moved in a more realistic manner.

(action/effect)
As explained above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first presentation position, and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position The direction of movement from to the production position is a common downward direction, and the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable object 32. big.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, thereby surprising the player.
Furthermore, it is possible to move and display at a speed that is difficult to achieve with the mounted movable body 32, or to move and display at a plurality of speeds, so it is possible to diversify the effects.

Although the feature section 241SG exemplifies a mode in which the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement speed of the mounted movable body 32 are compared, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first It may be a comparison between the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or a comparison between the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200. It may also be a comparison of speed with movement. In other words, if the speed of the moving display of the pseudo movable body display and the movement of the movable body are compared, the types of the pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be arbitrarily changed.

In addition, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 that performs a reaction motion of a predetermined amount of movement when it moves from the first origin position to the first performance position, and The control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 up and down between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position on the image display device 5. When moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stopping and displaying it at the first effect display position, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be displayed by moving in a predetermined movement amount. A reaction movement display (bounce display) is performed, and the movement amount L12 of the first reaction movement display is performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first effect position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and By displaying the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

Although the feature section 241SG exemplifies a form in which the reaction movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement amount of the reaction movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 are compared, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be a comparison between the reaction movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the movement amount of the reaction movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200, or the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body It may be a comparison between the reaction movement display of display Z200 and the reaction movement of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, when comparing the movement amount between the reaction motion display of the pseudo movable body display and the reaction motion of the movable body, the type of the pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be arbitrarily changed.

Further, during the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. In this case, the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without the development performance A being executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the developed performance A, which is a movable body performance, and the developed performance B, which is a pseudo movable body display performance, are executed.
It should be noted that when the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the development effect B is executed without the development effect A being executed. The phrase "the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the game is executed" includes the case where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is 100% when the advanced performance A and the advanced performance B are executed.

In addition, there is a preview effect A that foretells the possibility (expectation level) of the variable display result becoming a jackpot, a development effect B that notifies you that it will develop into a strong super reach effect, and a suggestion that the development effect B will be executed. In the preview performance A, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, the first specific performance display can be executed. position to a first specific initial display position and then hide it, and in advanced effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200 at the first specific effect display position, from the first specific effect display position. It is hidden without moving to the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 that is being displayed at the first specific initial display position is hidden before execution of development effect B. At this time, the character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position.
According to this feature, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so it is possible to control the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to an advantageous state without giving the player a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, in the development suggestion effect, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 gives priority to the display of the character image Z310 over moving and displaying it in the same way as the movable body, and moves from the first specific effect display position. Since it is hidden without returning to the first specific initial display position, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion of execution of the advanced effect B.

In addition, it is possible to perform a deciding performance that informs whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, and a developing performance B that notifies that the determining performance will be executed after developing into a strong super reach performance. When moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in B, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first specific effect display The reach title image Z51 is moved from the position to the first specific initial display position and is hidden without being displayed, and the display area including the first specific effect display position is changed to display the reach title image Z51 that suggests the execution of the advanced effect B. When moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 in a fixed effect, after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the corresponding The display is moved from the first effect display position to the first initial display position and then hidden.
According to this feature, before the decisive effect is executed, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 gives priority to displaying the suggestion image over moving and displaying it in the same way as a movable object as a structure. Since the display is hidden without returning from the position to the first display position, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion of execution of the decisive performance, while in the decisive performance, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is the same as the movable Since the information is displayed in a moving manner, it is possible to draw attention to the information that is advantageous to the player without giving the player a sense of discomfort.
In addition, the feature section 241SG exemplifies a form in which the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed in the developed effect B (specific effect), and the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed in the final effect (special effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common pseudo movable object display may be moved between the specific performance and the special performance.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the movement of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position for each display frame, at the first initial display position, at the first intermediate display position, and at the first intermediate display position. and the first effect display position, and a specific image ( For example, it is possible to display an effect image Z71) in which glass is cracked and an image Z71A showing a plurality of glass fragments is scattered.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 can be quickly moved and displayed without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized by a specific image to give a favorable impression to the player. Can be attached.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the movement of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position for each display frame, at the first initial display position, at the first intermediate display position, and at the first intermediate display position. and the first effect display position, and the moving display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specific initial display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200. A pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position in the preview effect B faster than the moving display from the position to the first specific effect display position. When PBY-4, which is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or The rate at which the jackpot state is controlled (jackpot expectation level) differs depending on when the patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 that are moved and displayed at the intermediate effect display position are executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed in a moving manner, and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different. The player can recognize the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 by the difference in the speed of the moving display.
In addition, in the preview performance B, a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed moving from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed moving from the second initial display position to the second performance display position When the pattern PBY-4 is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is executed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position, a jackpot is achieved. The ratio of being controlled by the state (jackpot expectation level) is different when the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot state is 100% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed in preview performance B, and pattern PBY- If the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state when 1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed is 0%, or when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed in advance presentation B, it is controlled to a jackpot state. This includes a case where the percentage of winning is 100% and the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state when pattern PBY-3 or PBY-4 is executed is 0%.

In addition, by making the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 display images having not only effect display parts Z100A and Z200A but also mechanism display parts Z100B and Z200B, etc., movable objects operated by a drive mechanism can be displayed. While it is possible to realize a movable body display performance similar to the movable body display by expressing the body more realistically, regarding the moving display, it is not only possible to display the body moving in the same manner as the movable body. By enabling a moving display that is difficult to realize due to the complicated mechanism and increased cost, the interest of the performance can be suitably improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, as a movement display that is difficult to realize with a movable body, high-speed movement, deformed display, and returning from the effect display position to the initial display position are erased without display (hidden). However, by realistically expressing the display mode of the pseudo movable object display and unrealistically displaying the moving display, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

In particular, it is possible to hide or display the pseudo-movable body display that has been moved to the performance display position at a desired timing, so for example, a movable body as a structure that has been moved to the performance display position can be returned to its original position. This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in design of a performance, such as avoiding a decrease in visibility due to other performance images being hidden, and making it possible to immediately start the next performance. play.

Furthermore, the movement amount L12 of the first reaction action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is smaller than that of the first non-mounted movable body M100. is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the movement is displayed from the first origin position to the first effect position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 causes the first non-mounted movable body M100 to move and display. It is possible to simulate the same effect as the first non-equipped movable body M100 without installing it, and also exaggerate the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-equipped movable body M100 moves to the first performance position. By displaying the game in this manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, since the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is longer than the movement distance L1 from the origin position to the effect position, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is installed. Since the moving speed is faster and the moving distance is longer than that of the movable body 32, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, the pseudo movable body display includes effect display parts Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B, and in the moving display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B are larger than the effect display parts Z100A, Z200A. By reaching the first effect display position first, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

Furthermore, the amount of movement L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is larger than the amount of movement L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable object 32, which makes the first pseudo movable object display Z100 more realistic. It can be moved and displayed in various ways.

In addition, the moving period of the mounted movable body 32 between the origin position and the production position includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases, and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display By not including the first period and the second period, the pseudo movable object display can be moved more smoothly than the movable object.

In addition, after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, the performance control CPU 120 causes the mounted movable body LED 208 to emit light and the light-emitting display section Z108A to emit light at approximately the same cycle. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

In addition, when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is being moved and displayed, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the light-emitting display section Z108A to emit light, thereby preventing the eye from seeing the incomplete first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that is being displayed in a moving manner. By not standing up, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect.

In addition, after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, the performance control CPU 120 causes the mounted movable body LED 208 to emit light and the light-emitting display section Z108A to emit light at approximately the same cycle. , it is possible to move and display the first pseudo movable body display Z100 in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position, and can move and display the second pseudo movable object display Z200 in the preview performance A. The downward direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific direction in preview effect B. By being different from the right direction in which the display is moved to the effect display position, one pseudo-movable object display can be moved and displayed from multiple display positions, allowing players to create surprising effects that are difficult to achieve with movable objects. can be provided to

Further, after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the effect control CPU 120 controls the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. By being able to move and display in a direction different from the above, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

(Modification 1)
Next, modification example 1 of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described based on FIG. 17-41. In FIG. 17-41, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing modification example 1 of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic section 241SG, as explained in FIG. 17-25, in the preview performance A, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, An example is shown in which the display is moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position and then erased, and then, as developed performance A, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position.

Here, as shown in FIG. 17-41(D), the movable range of the mounted movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 partially overlap, that is, the mounted movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap. When the movable body 32 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position overlap, the effect control CPU 120 moves the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position and displays the second pseudo When the moving display of the movable body display Z200 to the first specific effect display position is executed in a common period, the mounted movable body 32 overlaps on the front side of the second pseudo movable body display Z200, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed. As it becomes difficult to visually recognize the second pseudo-movable object display Z200, it becomes easy to understand that it is a display object rather than a structure, and the interest of the performance decreases.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 17-41(A), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. After displaying (see Figure 17-41 (B)), by moving from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position and erasing it without displaying it (see Figure 17-41 (C)), As shown in -41(D), the mounted movable body 32 that has moved from the origin position to the performance position as the advanced performance A may be avoided from overlapping with the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

(Modification 2)
Next, a second modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described based on FIG. 17-42. In FIG. 17-42, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a second modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position and the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first production display position are common. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the mounting movable body 401 as the second modification is in the first position and in the lower direction than the first position. a direction in which the pseudo movable object display Z402 as the second modification moves between the first display position and a second display position above the first display position; , are in a common direction (e.g., vertical direction), the moving display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position is better than the movement display from the first position of the mounted movable body 401 to the second display position. It just needs to be faster than moving to the location.

Also, the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position (downward) and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position (upward). and may be in different directions.

Further, in the characteristic section 241SG, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are not performed in a common period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and by performing the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 in a common period, as in the present modification example 2, the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402 can be moved. It may also be possible to perform an effect using the movable object display Z402.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-42, the mounting movable body 401 as the second modification is a structure on which the character "A" is displayed, and The mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R in Modification 2 are movable between a first position and a second position below the first position, and are located at first predetermined positions on the left and right sides of the display area of the image display device 5. and a second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modification example 2 can display the character "BODY", and the image display device The display can be moved between a first display position at the bottom of the display area of No. 5 and a second display position above the first display position. Note that detailed illustrations and explanations of the drive mechanisms of the movable mounting body 401 and the movable mounting bodies 501L and 501R will be omitted.

For example, when executing a performance using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo movable body display Z402 in the aforementioned preview performances A, B, advanced performances A, B, etc., the performance control CPU 120 first As shown in FIG. 17-42(A), with the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R waiting in the first position, the pseudo movable body display is displayed as shown in FIG. 17-42(B). After Z402 is displayed at the first display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, as shown in FIG. 17-42(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-42(D), the mounting movable body 401 is moved from the first position to the second position. Then, when the mounted movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 on the pseudo movable body display Z402 so that it does not overlap.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17-42(E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves to the first display position, the mounted movable body 401 moves to the first position. It is closest to the movable object display Z402 and enters a pseudo-combined state in which the word "combined" can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 17-42(F), the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward while maintaining the pseudo-combined state of the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved upward. By moving the display upward and further moving the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R to a second predetermined position, it is announced that the performance will develop due to the successful pseudo-combination.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17-42 (G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the first position or the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved to the first display position. The image is moved and displayed in a manner in which the image is divided into different first specific display positions (for example, positions on the left and right sides), and then erased in a manner in which the image is framed out to the left and right of the screen or faded out.

On the other hand, if it is decided to notify that the pseudo combination is not successful and the performance will not develop, etc., as shown in FIG. 17-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 moves downward and the pseudo movement By decelerating and stopping the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 while displaying the downward movement of the body display Z402, and displaying the pseudo movable body display Z402 with the upper part destroyed, It is reported that the pseudo-combination is not successful and the performance does not develop. In this way, the pseudo movable object display Z402 can easily realize effects that are difficult to realize with a movable object as a structure.

(Modification 3)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described based on FIG. 17-43. In FIG. 17-43, (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the feature section 241SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 can be moved and displayed between the first display position and the second display position. , the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to one that can perform reciprocating display in one direction such as the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. For example, the production control CPU 120 may be A) As shown in (B), after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, as shown in FIG. 17-43 (C), the first It may be possible to move and display in a direction different from the direction in which the movement and display are performed from the initial display position to the first effect display position.

As shown in Figure 17-43 (C), at the first effect display position, only the effect display section Z200A is vertically rotated around the rotation axis pointing in the left-right direction. It is preferable to be able to perform various types of moving display, such as different rotational movement displays, and moving display in a manner that moves in a direction different from one direction (for example, the depth direction). By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

Although the characteristic portion 241SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and changes and additions may be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. are also included in the present invention.

(Explanation regarding transformation and application)
In the feature section 241SG, a configuration in which the mounted movable body 32 is applied as a movable body mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of mounted movable bodies other than the mounted movable body 32 are used as an example. A movable body may be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Moreover, it is not limited to the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2, but may also be a frame-side movable body provided on the game machine frame 3 or an opening/closing door that can open and close the game machine frame 3. A pseudo movable body display imitating the side movable body may be movably displayed. Further, as the board-side movable body, it may be possible to display a pseudo movable body display that imitates a variable winning device or the like provided in connection with the game.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, an example is illustrated in which a first non-mounted movable body M100 and a second non-mounted movable body M200 are applied as movable bodies that were scheduled to be installed in the pachinko game machine 1 but were not installed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 were scheduled to be installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but they were not installed. Good too.

Further, in the characteristic section 241SG, when erasing the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200, a mode is exemplified in which the display is gradually faded out, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image may be displayed to emphasize that the image has been erased, or erasing may be performed using other methods.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position is the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first production display position. A common effect image Z71 in which the glass is cracked and glass fragments are scattered is displayed when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. Although the form in which sound effects are output is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position is determined by the first pseudo movable body display Z100. An effect image that is longer than the movement display distance L2 from the initial display position to the first effect display position and that has different modes when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. A different sound effect may be output at the same time as the display. By doing so, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be highlighted using the movement display of the pseudo movable body display.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, during the variable display period of the super reach, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be executed up to two times in the development effect A and the determined effect, and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is , the preview performance B and the decision performance can be executed up to two times, and the moving display of the second pseudo movable object display Z200 can be performed up to four times: the preview performance A, the preview performance B, the development suggestion performance, and the development performance B. Although a certain form has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the movable body and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display may be executed a number of times other than the above-mentioned number of times.

Furthermore, when the movable object is allowed to move a first number of times in one variable display period, it is possible to allow the pseudo-movable object display to move a second number of times, which is greater than the first number, in one variable display period. preferable. By doing this, instead of increasing the chances of performing the movable object display too much and lowering the jackpot expectation level, by increasing the opportunity to perform the pseudo-movable object display, the performance will be reduced. This can prevent you from losing interest.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned multiple performances, for example, during symbol promotion in the re-drawing after jackpot confirmation notification, or during jackpot production, the pseudo movable body display may be displayed moving, and the pseudo movable body displayed at that time may be moved. The movable body display may be a pseudo movable body display different from the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

In addition, preview performance A is applied as a special suggestion performance that suggests that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state, and development performance B is applied as a notification performance that informs the player of contents that are advantageous to the player, thereby indicating that the notification performance will be executed. A development suggestion performance is applied as a predetermined performance to suggest, a decision performance is applied as a special performance to notify that the control is in an advantageous state, and the special performance is suggested to be executed before the special performance is executed. Although a form in which preview performance B is applied as the specific performance has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and various performances other than those described above can be applied. Moreover, although these various effects can be performed in one variable display period of super reach, they may be effects that can be performed over a plurality of variable display periods.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, content that is advantageous to the player includes pseudo-runs, jackpots, small hits, reach, hold-up runs, chance-up effects, pre-read notice effects, time-savers and misses, and ceiling-time-savers control (described later). , variable display results, controls, and effects may be included. Further, in the slot machine, chance zone (CZ) winnings, assist time (AT) winnings, replay time (RT) winnings, bonus winnings, etc. may be included.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when starting the display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200, the game effect lamps 9, etc. provided on the game board 2 and the gaming machine frame 3, etc. By reducing the brightness or turning off the lights, the display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be made conspicuous, while the display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be made conspicuous. When erasing, by increasing the brightness or turning on the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3, the game on the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased. can distract people's consciousness.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, while it is possible to adjust the light intensity of the game effect lamps 9 and the like provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 by the player's operation, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 It is preferable that the light amount adjustment of the light emitting display part Z108A and the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E of the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is made impossible by the player's operation. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo movable object display from being impaired or from becoming inconspicuous.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, when hiding the second pseudo movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position in the development suggestion production, the display area including the first specific production display position is Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the character image Z310 is displayed with priority as the notification-related image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification-related image is an image related to the notification effect (for example, development effect B). If available, images other than character images (for example, images imitating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) may be used.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, in the advanced presentation B, a mode is shown in which the reach title image Z51 is displayed as a suggestion image suggesting execution of the final presentation in the manner at the start of display, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, images other than the reach title image may be used as the suggestion image (for example, a character image that appears in a strong super reach effect or a decisive effect) as long as it suggests the execution of a specific effect. .

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, a configuration in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 can be displayed in separate periods has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a plurality of pseudo movable object displays may be displayed moving during a common period. In this case, for example, the movable and displayable range of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movable and displayable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200, by displaying one of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on a display layer closer to the other than the other, Since it is possible to make people conscious of the front and rear positional relationship, it is possible to realize a more realistic performance.

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 241SG, it is taken into consideration that the mechanism display sections Z100B and Z200B of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 are displayed cut off at the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. Then, the mounted movable body, center decorative frame, etc. may be arranged so as to cover up the part where the display of the mechanism display section of the pseudo movable body display starts in the display area of the image display device 5, or the mounted movable body The part where the display of the mechanism display section of the pseudo movable body display starts may be made difficult to see by moving the body.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, the display result of the variable display has been exemplified as including "time saving error"; The variable display will be displayed a specified number of times (for example, 900 times, etc.) from the time when one of the following is established: performing a clearing process to clear the counter and buffer, controlling the game to a jackpot gaming state, and displaying the display result as a time-saving result. ) Based on what has been done, it may be possible to execute ceiling time saving control that controls the time saving state without going through the jackpot game state. Note that the internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state due to the ceiling time reduction control (for example, 900 times) is different from the number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state (for example, 100 times). may be different.

When the ceiling time saving control as described above is executed and the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specified number of times without the above predetermined condition being satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second It may be possible to perform a moving display of a pseudo movable object display such as the pseudo movable object display Z200. In this way, it may be possible to perform a moving display of the pseudo movable object display in each notification, such as notification of a jackpot, notification of a time-saving hit or loss, notification of ceiling time-saving control, etc., and in each notification, the type of pseudo-movable object display and the moving display may be executed. The aspects may also be different.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner as a notification of a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result may be a small win or a time saver. In the case of a miss or when the above-mentioned ceiling time saving control is executed, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 are moved to notify you of a small hit or a loss of time saving, and to perform the ceiling time saving control. While notifying that the execution condition has been met, if the variable display result indicates a jackpot, the jackpot may be notified by moving the mounted movable body 32.

In addition, a common type of pseudo-movable object display is used to notify when the display result of the variable display is a small hit or time-saving loss, and when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot, but the movable display The embodiments may be different. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a small hit or time-saving loss, and when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot, a pseudo-movable object display is used to notify, but the type of pseudo-movable object display is It may be different.

Furthermore, in the feature section 241SG, a so-called pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of a jackpot game is applied as an example of the pachinko game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. , it may be a so-called 1 type 2 type gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by generating a V prize triggered by a small win in a time saving state after the end of a jackpot game, and the gaming characteristics can be changed in various ways. be.

Further, in the embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls is The loaned balls that are recirculated inside the machine and are lent out in response to a player's lending request and the number of prize balls given in response to winnings are added up, while the number of game balls used in the game is counted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the value is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of a game medium, but the invention is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a gaming value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Further, a gaming machine capable of playing games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, but may be a general gaming machine.

1,75SG001 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 32 Mounting movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU
300 First presentation unit 301 Base member 302 Cover member 303 LED board 331 Decorative pattern 400 Second presentation unit 401 Base member 402 Cover member 403 LED board 420 Decoration section 600 Third presentation unit 800 Fourth presentation unit 801 Base member 802 Cover member 803 LED board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
An electronic component that is visible to the player;
a specific member provided around the electronic component;
a translucent member that is a translucent member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
A predetermined electronic component that is difficult or invisible to the player, and
a predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component;
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The light-transmitting member is provided in front of the electronic component and the specific member,
The predetermined member has a color that is not similar to that of the predetermined electronic component,
A decorative portion is provided at a position corresponding to a boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a special effect that notifies that the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
A specific performance can be executed before the special performance is executed,
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display can be displayed in a moving manner in the specific performance and the special performance,
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in the specific performance, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, the display moves from the second display position to the first display. It is possible to hide the display without moving it to a position, and display a suggestion image suggesting execution of the special effect in a display area including the second display position,
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in the special performance, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, the display moves from the second display position to the first display. A gaming machine that can be moved to a certain position, displayed, and then hidden.